Avaya AP-4 Network Router User Manual

AP-4, AP-5, and AP-6
Copyrights
• Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc.
• Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft
Corporation.
• All trademarks mentioned herein belong to their respective
owners.
Publication Information
Copyright © 2004 Avaya, Inc. All rights reserved.
Part Number: 66221/B
Document Number: 555-301-708, Release 2.4.11
Date: April 2004
Regulatory Information
See the Regulatory Flyer that came with your AP-3 unit or go to the CDROM to view the information.
Warranty
Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your
sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition,
Avaya’s standard warranty language as well as information regarding
support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the
following Web site: www.avaya.com/support
Notice
While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this
book was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya can
assume no responsibility for any errors. Changes and corrections to the
information contained in this document may be incorporated into future
reissues.
How to Get Help
For additional support telephone numbers, go to the Avaya support Web
site: http://www.avaya.com/support. If you are:
• Within the United States, click the Escalation Management link.
Then click the appropriate link for the type of support you need.
• Outside the United States, click the Escalation Management link.
Then click the International Services link that includes telephone
numbers for the international Centers of Excellence.
TCP/IP Facilities
Customers may experience differences in product performance, reliability
and security depending upon network configurations/design and
topologies, even when the product performs as warranted.
To order copies of this and other documents
For the most current versions of documentation, go to the Avaya support
Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support.
AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introduction to Wireless Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Guidelines for Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
IEEE 802.11 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
802.11b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
802.11a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
802.11g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Management and Monitoring Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
HTTP/HTTPS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Product Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
MiniPCI Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
ScanTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Download the Latest Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Setup your TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1
Download Updates from a TFTP Server using the Web Interface 2-46
Download Updates from a TFTP Server using the CLI Interface 2-47
Additional Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Installing the AP in a Plenum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Kensington Security Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Related Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
3 Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4 Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Dynamic DNS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
IP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
DHCP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Link Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Operational Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Wireless (802.11a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Wireless (802.11b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Wireless (802.11b/g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Wireless (802.11a/g) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
IP Access Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Ethernet Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Static MAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
TCP/UDP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Alarm Host Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Syslog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Storm Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Intra BSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Packet Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Authentication and Encryption Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Authentication Protocol Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
VLAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
VLAN Workgroups and Traffic Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Typical User VLAN Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Typical VLAN Management Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
MAC Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
3
Rogue Access Point Detection (RAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAC Access Control by Means of RADIUS Authentication . . .
RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-149
4-155
4-156
4-161
4-164
5 Monitor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
ICMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
IP/ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Learn Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
IAPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Link Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Station Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Enabling and Viewing Station Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Refreshing Station Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
6 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
TFTP File Transfer Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
HTTP File Transfer Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Image Error Checking during File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Update AP by Using TFTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Update AP by Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Upload File by Using TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upload File by Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
6-16
6-19
6-21
6-22
7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
In This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Troubleshooting Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Symptoms and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Connectivity Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Basic Software Setup and Configuration Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Client Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
VLAN Operation Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Power over Ethernet (PoE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Recovery Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Reset to Factory Default Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Forced Reload Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Setting IP Address using Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Related Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
RADIUS Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A The Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
In This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-1
A-3
A-3
A-3
5
Important Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Navigation and Special Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
CLI Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Bootloader CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
CLI Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Entering Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
CLI Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
The Question Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
The Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Accessing the AP CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Using HyperTerminal to Log in to the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Using Telnet to Log in to the AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
done. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
passwd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
quit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Auto Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Auto Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
DHCP Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DHCP Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Address Pool Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNS Client Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Interface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Protocol Filtering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Protocol Filtering Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static MAC Address Filter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proxy ARP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP ARP Filtering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broadcast Filtering Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/UDP Port Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/UDP Port Filtering Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HTTP and HTTPS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HTTP (Web browser) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IAPP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IAPP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intra BSS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intra BSS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inventory Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inventory Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Access Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-43
A-43
A-44
A-45
A-46
A-46
A-46
A-48
A-48
A-48
A-50
A-50
A-50
A-51
A-52
A-53
A-53
A-54
A-54
A-57
A-57
A-58
A-60
A-60
A-61
A-61
A-61
A-62
A-62
A-62
7
IP Access Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Integrity Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Integrity Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Target Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAC Access Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAC Access Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAC Access Control Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Forwarding Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Forwarding Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rogue Access Point Detection (RAD) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General RADIUS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Authentication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Accounting Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
A-62
A-63
A-64
A-64
A-65
A-65
A-65
A-66
A-67
A-68
A-68
A-68
A-69
A-70
A-71
A-71
A-72
A-73
A-73
A-74
A-74
A-75
A-77
A-78
A-82
A-82
A-83
A-83
A-84
A-84
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SNMP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
SNMP Trap Host Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Spanning Tree Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Spanning Tree Priority and Path Cost Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
SpectraLink VoIP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
SpectraLink VoIP Parameters (802.11b and bg Modes Only). . . A-90
Storm Threshold Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Storm Threshold Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Storm Threshold Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Syslog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Syslog Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Syslog Host Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
System Information Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
Telnet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Telnet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
TFTP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
TFTP Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
WDS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Security Table Parameters . . A102
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
802.11a Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
9
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b/g Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless Interface SSID Table Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN/SSID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN ID Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-105
A-107
A-108
A-111
A-115
A-115
A-121
A-121
A-123
A-125
A-125
A-126
A-127
B ASCII Character Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
In This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Stations per BSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Bridging Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Medium Access Control (MAC) Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Wireless Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
C-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-7
C-8
C-9
C-9
C-9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11a Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11g Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless Communication Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-10
C-11
C-12
C-14
C-16
C-18
D Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Before You Seek Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
11
12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Introduction
1
In This Chapter
The following topics are covered in this section:
• Document Conventions
• Introduction to Wireless Networking
• IEEE 802.11 Specifications
• Management and Monitoring Capabilities
Document Conventions
• The term, AP, refers to an Access Point.
• The term, 802.11, is used to describe features that apply to the
802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g wireless standards.
• A Single-radio AP is an Access Point that supports one IEEE radio
standard. The AP-4, AP-5, and AP-6 are Single-radio APs.
• An 802.11a AP is an Access Point that supports the IEEE 802.11a
standard.
• An 802.11b AP is an Access Point that supports the IEEE 802.11b
standard.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-1
Introduction to Wireless Networking
• An 802.11b/g AP is an Access Point that supports the IEEE 802.11g
standard.
• An 802.11a/g AP is an Access Point that supports the IEEE
802.11a/g standards.
• Blue text indicates a link to a topic or Web address. If you are
viewing this documentation on your computer, click the blue text to
jump to the linked item.
NOTE:
A Note indicates important information that helps you make better
use of your computer.
! CAUTION:
A Caution indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data
and tells you how to avoid the problem.
Introduction to Wireless Networking
An AP extends the capability of an existing Ethernet network to devices
on a wireless network. Wireless devices can
• connect to a single Access Point, or
• move between multiple Access Points located within the same
vicinity. As wireless clients move from one coverage cell to another,
the devices maintain network connectivity.
1-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Introduction to Wireless Networking
Site Survey
To determine the best location for an Access Point, Avaya recommends
conducting a Site Survey before placing the device in its final location. For
information about how to conduct a Site Survey, contact your local
reseller.
Before an Access Point can be configured for your specific networking
requirements, it must first be initialized. See Getting Started for details.
Figure 1-1.
Typical wireless network access infrastructure
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-3
Introduction to Wireless Networking
Once initialized, the network administrator can configure each unit
according to the network’s requirements. The AP functions as a wireless
network access point to data networks. An AP network provides:
• Seamless client roaming
• Easy installation and operation
• Over-the-air encryption of data
• High speed network links
To be fully operational, the AP-3 needs at least one wireless card
installed.
Guidelines for Roaming
Wireless Standard Support
An AP can only communicate with client devices that support its wireless
standard. For example, an 802.11a client cannot communicate with an
802.11b AP and an 802.11b client cannot communicate with an 802.11a
AP. However, both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with an
802.11b/g AP.
1-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Introduction to Wireless Networking
Network Names
• All Access Points must have the same Network Name to support
client roaming.
• All workstations with an 802.11 client adapter installed must use
either a Network Name of “any” or the same Network Name as the
Access Points that they will roam between. If an AP has Closed
System enabled, a client must have the same Network Name as the
Access Point to communicate (see Interfaces).
Security Settings
All Access Points and clients must have the same security settings to
communicate.
Cell Coverage
• The Access Points’ cells must overlap to ensure that there are no
gaps in coverage and to ensure that the roaming client will always
have a connection available.
• The coverage area of an 802.11b or 802.11b/g AP is larger than the
coverage area of an 802.11a AP. The 802.11b and 802.11b/g APs
operate in the 2.4 GHz frequency band; the 802.11a AP operates in
the 5 GHz band. Products that operate in the 2.4 GHz band offer
greater range than products that operate in the 5 GHz band.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-5
IEEE 802.11 Specifications
Data Rates
An 802.11a or 802.11b/g AP operates at faster data rates than the
802.11b AP. 802.11a and 802.11g products operate at speeds of up to 54
Mbits/sec; 802.11b products operate at speeds of up to 11 Mbits/sec.
Channels
• All Access Points in the same vicinity should use a unique,
independent Channel. By default, the AP automatically scans for
available Channels during boot-up but you can also set the Channel
manually (see Interfaces for details).
• Access Points that use the same Channel should be installed as far
away from each other as possible to reduce potential interference.
IEEE 802.11 Specifications
In 1997, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
adopted the 802.11 standard for wireless devices operating in the 2.4
GHz frequency band. This standard includes provisions for three radio
technologies: direct sequence spread spectrum, frequency hopping
spread spectrum, and infrared. Devices that comply with the 802.11
standard operate at a data rate of either 1 or 2 Megabits per second
(Mbits/sec).
1-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
IEEE 802.11 Specifications
802.11b
In 1999, the IEEE modified the 802.11 standard to support direct
sequence devices that can operate at speeds of up to 11 Mbits/sec. The
IEEE ratified this standard as 802.11b. 802.11b devices are backwards
compatible with 2.4 GHz 802.11 direct sequence devices (that operate at
1 or 2 Mbits/sec). Available Frequency Channels vary by regulatory
domain and/or country. See 802.11b Channel Frequencies for details.
802.11a
Also in 1999, the IEEE modified the 802.11 standard to support devices
operating in the 5 GHz frequency band. This standard is referred to as
802.11a. 802.11a devices are not compatible with 2.4 GHz 802.11 or
802.11b devices. 802.11a radios use a radio technology called
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) to achieve data
rates of up to 54 Mbits/sec. Available Frequency Channels vary by
regulatory domain and/or country. See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for
details.
802.11g
In 2003, the IEEE introduced the 802.11g standard. 802.11g devices
operate in the 2.4 GHz frequency band using OFDM to achieve data rates
of up to 54 Mbits/sec. In addition, 802.11g devices are backwards
compatible with 802.11b devices. Available Frequency Channels vary by
regulatory domain and/or country. See 802.11g Channel Frequencies for
details.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-7
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
There are three management and monitoring interfaces available to the
network administrator to configure and manage an AP on the network:
• HTTP/HTTPS Interface
• Command Line Interface
• SNMP Management
HTTP/HTTPS Interface
The HTTP Interface (also known as the Web browser Interface) provides
easy access to configuration settings and network statistics from any
computer on the network. You can access the Web or HTTP Interface:
• over your LAN (switch, hub, etc.),
• over the Internet, or
• with a “crossover” Ethernet cable connected directly to your
computer’s Ethernet Port.
HTTPS provides an HTTP connection over a Secure Socket Layer.
HTTPS is one of two available secure management options on the AP;
the other secure management option is SNMPv3. Enabling HTTPS allows
you to access the AP in a secure fashion using Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) over port 443. The AP supports SSLv3 with a 128-bit encryption
certificate maintained by the AP for secure communications between the
AP and the HTTP client. All communications are encrypted using the
server and the client-side certificate.
1-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
The AP comes pre-installed with all required SSL files: default certificate,
private key and SSL Certificate Passphrase installed.
Command Line Interface
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based configuration utility
that supports a set of keyboard commands and parameters to configure
and manage an AP.
Users enter Command Statements, composed of CLI Commands and
their associated parameters. Statements may be issued from the
keyboard for real time control, or from scripts that automate configuration.
For example, when downloading a file, administrators enter the
download CLI Command along with IP Address, file name, and file type
parameters.
How To Access the CLI
You access the CLI over a HyperTerminal serial connection or via Telnet.
During initial configuration, you can use the CLI over a serial port
connection to configure an Access Point’s IP address.
When accessing the CLI via Telnet, you can communicate with the
Access Point from over your LAN (switch, hub, etc.), from over the
Internet, or with a “crossover” Ethernet cable connected directly to your
computer’s Ethernet Port.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-9
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
See The Command Line Interface for more information on the CLI and for
a list of CLI commands and parameters.
SNMP Management
You can also manage and configure an AP using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
NOTE:
This requires an SNMP manager program, like HP Openview or
Castlerock’s SNMPc.
The AP supports several Management Information Base (MIB) files that
describe the parameters that can be viewed and/or configured over
SNMP:
• MIB-II (RFC 1213)
• Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
• Ethernet-like MIB (RFC 1643)
• 802.11 MIB
• Avaya Wireless Enterprise MIB
Avaya provides these MIB files on the CD included with each
Access Point. You need to compile one or more of the above MIBs into
your SNMP program’s database before you can manage an Access Point
using SNMP. Refer to the documentation that came with your SNMP
manager for instructions on how to compile MIBs.
1-10
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
The Enterprise MIB defines the read and read-write objects that can be
viewed or configured using SNMP. These objects correspond to most of
the settings and statistics that are available with the other management
interfaces. Refer to the Enterprise MIB for more information; the MIB can
be opened with any text editor, such as Microsoft Word, Notepad, or
WordPad.
SNMPv3 Secure Management
SNMPv3 is one of two available secure management options on the AP;
the other secure management option is HTTPS (HTTP connection over
Secure Socket Layer). SNMPv3 is based on the existing SNMP
framework, but addresses security requirements for device and network
management.
The security threats addressed by Secure Management are:
• Modification of information: An entity could alter an in-transit
message generated by an authorized entity in such a way as to
effect unauthorized management operations, including the setting of
object values. The essence of this threat is that an unauthorized
entity could change any management parameter, including those
related to configuration, operations, and accounting
• Masquerade: Management operations that are not authorized for
some entity may be attempted by that entity by assuming the identity
of an authorized entity.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
1-11
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
• Message stream modification: SNMP is designed to operate over a
connectionless transport protocol. There is a threat that SNMP
messages could be reordered, delayed, or replayed (duplicated) to
effect unauthorized management operations. For example, a
message to reboot a device could be copied and replayed later.
• Disclosure: An entity could observe exchanges between a manager
and an agent and thereby learns the values of managed objects and
learn of notifiable events. For example, the observation of a set
command that changes passwords would enable an attacker to
learn the new passwords.
To address the security threats listed above, SNMPv3 provides the
following when secure management is enabled:
• Authentication: Provides data integrity and data origin
authentication.
• Privacy (a.k.a Encryption): Protects against disclosure of message
payload.
• Access Control: Controls and authorizes access to managed objects
NOTE:
The remainder of this guide describes how to configure an AP using
the HTTP Web interface or the CLI interface. For information on how
to manage devices using SNMP, refer to the documentation that
came with your SNMP program. Also, refer to the MIB files for
information on the parameters available via SNMP.
1-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Getting Started
2
In This Chapter
• Prerequisites
• Product Package
• System Requirements
• Hardware Installation
• Initialization
• Download the Latest Software
• Additional Hardware Features
Prerequisites
Before installing an AP, you need to gather certain network information.
The following section identifies the information you need.
NOTE:
Passwords must be configured with at least 6 characters in length.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-1
Prerequisites
Information
Description
Network Name
(SSID of the
wireless cards)
Assign the Access Point a Primary Network
Name before wireless users can
communicate with it. The clients also need
the same Network Name. This is not the
same as the System Name, which applies
only to the Access Point. The network
administrator typically provides the Network
Name.
AP’s IP Address
If you do not have a DHCP server on your
network, then you need to assign the
Access Point an IP address that is valid on
your network.
HTTP (Web)
Interface Password
Each Access Point requires a read/write
password to access the Web interface. The
default password is “public”.
CLI Interface
Password
Each Access Point requires a read/write
password to access the CLI interface. The
default password is “public”.
SNMP Read
Password
Each Access Point requires a password to
allow get requests from an SNMP manager.
The default password is “public”.
1 of 3
2-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Prerequisites
Information
Description
SNMPv3
Authentication
Password
If Secure Management is enabled, each
Access Point requires a password for
sending authenticated SNMPv3 messages.
The default password is “public”.
SNMPv3 Privacy
Password
If Secure Management is enabled, each
Access Point requires a password when
sending encrypted SNMPv3 data. The default
password is “public”.
SNMP Read-Write
Password
Each Access Point requires a password to
allow get and set requests from an SNMP
manager. The default password is “public”.
This password must be at least 6 characters
in length.
Security Settings
You need to determine what security features
you will enable on the Access Point.
Authentication
Method
A primary authentication server may be
configured; a backup authentication server is
optional. The network administrator typically
provides this information.
2 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-3
Prerequisites
Information
Description
Authentication
Server Shared
Secret
This is a password shared between the
Access Point and the RADIUS authentication
server (so both passwords must be the
same), and is typically provided by the
network administrator.
Authentication
Server
Authentication Port
This is a port number (default is 1812) and is
typically provided by the network
administrator.
Client IP Address
Pool Allocation
Scheme
The Access Point can automatically provide
IP addresses to clients as they sign on. The
network administrator typically provides the
IP Pool range.
DNS Server IP
Address
The network administrator typically provides
this IP Address.
3 of 3
2-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Product Package
Product Package
Each Single-radio AP comes with the following:
• One metal base for ceiling or desktop mounting (includes two
screws)
• Mounting hardware
— Four 3.5 mm x 40 mm screws
— Four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs
• One power supply
• One Installation CD-ROM that contains the following:
— Software Installation Wizard
— ScanTool
— Solarwinds TFTP software
— HTML Help
— this user’s guide in PDF format
• One Access Point Quick Start Guide
If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your reseller
or Technical Support (see Technical Support for contact information).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-5
System Requirements
MiniPCI Upgrade Kits
Single-radio APs can be fitted with different radio types. MiniPCI upgrade
kits are available for 802.11a /b/g and 802.11b/g wireless cards. Each kit
is composed of a single miniPCI board with an integral antenna attached.
The type of radio is indicated on the label on the antenna and instructions
on how to open your AP to replace the radio are provided with the kit.
System Requirements
The following are the minimum requirements to begin using an AP:
• A 10Base-T Ethernet or 100Base-TX Fast Ethernet switch or hub
• At least one of the following IEEE 802.11-compliant devices:
You will need an:
2-6
If you have an:
802.11a client device
802.11a AP
802.11b or 802.11b/g client device
802.11b AP
802.11b/g client device
802.11b/g AP
802.11a/g client device
802.11a/g AP
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Installation
• A computer that is connected to the same IP network as the AP and
has one of the following Web browsers installed:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later and
patch Q323308
— Netscape 6.1 or later
(The computer is required to configure the AP using the Web or
HTTP interface.)
Hardware Installation
Follow these steps to install a Single-radio AP:
1. Unpack the Access Point and accessories from the shipping box.
2. If you intend to install the unit free-standing or if you intend to
mount it to the ceiling, use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the
metal base to the underside of the unit. The metal base and
screws are provided. See Mounting Options for additional
information.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-7
Hardware Installation
Figure 2-1.
2-8
Attach the Metal Base
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Installation
3. Press down on the cable-cover lock located in the front-center of
the unit to release the cable cover.
Figure 2-2.
Unlock the Cable Cover
cable-cover lock
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-9
Hardware Installation
4. Remove the cable cover from the unit.
Figure 2-3.
2-10
Remove Cable Cover
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Installation
5. Remove the front cover (the side with the LED indicators) from the
unit.
Figure 2-4.
Remove the Front Cover
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-11
Hardware Installation
6. Remove the back cover from the unit.
Figure 2-5.
2-12
Remove the Back Cover
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Installation
7. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Access Point’s
Ethernet port. The other end of the cable should not be connected
to another device until after the installation is complete.
— Use a straight-through Ethernet cable if you intend to connect
the Access Point to a hub, switch, patch panel, or Power over
Ethernet power injector.
— Use a cross-over Ethernet cable if you intend to connect the
Access Point to a single computer.
8. If you are not using Power over Ethernet (or you want to connect
the Access Point to Power over Ethernet and AC power
simultaneously), attach the AC power cable to the Access Point’s
power port.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-13
Hardware Installation
Figure 2-6.
Attach Ethernet Cable and Power Cable
Power Cable
Ethernet Cable
NOTE:
Once attached, the power cable locks into place. To disconnect the
power cable, slide back the black plastic fitting and gently pull the
cable from the connector.
2-14
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Installation
9. Connect the free end of the Ethernet cable to a hub, switch, patch
panel, Power over Ethernet power injector, or an Ethernet port on a
computer.
10. If using AC power, connect the power cord to a power source (such
as a wall outlet) to turn on the unit.
11. Configure and test the unit. See Initialization for details.
12. Download the latest software to the unit, if necessary. See
Download the Latest Software for details.
13. Place the unit in the final installation location. See Mounting
Options for mounting options and instructions.
NOTE:
Avaya recommends that you perform a Site Survey prior to
determine the installation location for your AP units. For information
about how to conduct a Site Survey, contact your local reseller.
14. Replace the back cover, front cover, and cable cover. Be careful to
avoid trapping the power and Ethernet cables when replacing the
cable cover.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-15
Hardware Installation
Figure 2-7.
Assembled Unit
15. If desired, you can attach a Kensington lock to secure the cable
cover into place. This will protect the unit from unauthorized
tampering. See Kensington Security Slot for details.
2-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Initialization
Avaya provides two tools to simplify the initialization and configuration of
an AP:
• ScanTool
• Setup Wizard
ScanTool is included on the Installation CD; the Setup Wizard launches
automatically the first time you access the HTTP interface.
NOTE:
These initialization instructions describe how to configure an AP
over an Ethernet connection using ScanTool and the HTTP
interface. If you want to configure the unit over the serial port, see
Setting IP Address using Serial Port for information on how to
access the CLI over a serial connection and The Command Line
Interface for a list of supported commands.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-17
Initialization
ScanTool
ScanTool is a software utility that is included on the installation CD-ROM.
ScanTool allows you to find the IP address of an Access Point by
referencing the MAC address in a Scan List, or to assign an IP address if
one has not been assigned.
ScanTool automatically
• detects the Access Points installed on your network, regardless of
IP address,
• lets you configure each unit’s IP settings, and
• allows you to download new software to an AP that does not have a
valid software image installed (see Client Connection Problems).
To access the HTTP interface and configure the AP, the AP must be
assigned an IP address that is valid on its Ethernet network. By default,
the AP is configured to obtain an IP address automatically from a network
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server during boot-up. If
your network contains a DHCP server, you can run ScanTool to find out
what IP address the AP has been assigned.
Default IP Address
If your network does not contain a DHCP server, the Access Point’s IP
address defaults to 169.254.128.132. In this case, you can use ScanTool
to assign the AP a static IP address that is valid on your network.
2-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
ScanTool Instructions
Follow these steps to install ScanTool, initialize the Access Point, and
perform initial configuration:
1. Locate the unit’s Ethernet MAC address and write it down for future
reference. The MAC address is printed on the product label. Each
unit has a unique MAC address, which is assigned at the factory.
2. Confirm that the AP is connected to the same LAN subnet as the
computer that you will use to configure the AP.
3. Power up, reboot, or reset the AP.
— Result: The unit requests an IP Address from the network
DHCP server.
4. Insert the Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive of the computer
that you will use to configure the AP.
— Result: The installation program will launch automatically.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Access Point
software and documentation.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-19
Initialization
NOTE:
The Avaya Wireless Installation program supports the following
operating systems:
— Windows 98SE
— Windows 2000
— Windows NT
— Windows ME
— Windows XP
6. After the software has been installed, double-click the ScanTool
icon on the Windows desktop to launch the program (if the
program is not already running).
— Result: ScanTool scans the subnet and displays all detected
Access Points. The ScanTool’s Scan List screen appears, as
shown in the following example.
NOTE:
If your computer has more than one network adapter installed, you
will be prompted to select the adapter that you want ScanTool to use
before the Scan List appears. If prompted, select an adapter and
click OK. You can change your adapter setting at any time by
clicking the Select Adapter button on the Scan List screen.
The ScanTool Network Adapter Selection screen will not appear
if your computer only has one network adapter installed.
2-20
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Figure 2-8.
Scan List
7. Locate the MAC address of the AP you want to initialize within the
Scan List.
NOTE:
If your Access Point does not show up in the Scan List, click the
Rescan button to update the display. If the unit still does not appear
in the list, see Troubleshooting for suggestions. Note that after
rebooting an Access Point, it may take up to five minutes for the unit
to appear in the Scan List.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-21
Initialization
8. Do one of the following:
— If the AP has been assigned an IP address by a DHCP server
on the network, write down the IP address and click Cancel to
close ScanTool. Go to Setup Wizard for information on how to
access the HTTP interface using this IP address.
— If the AP has not been assigned an IP address (in other words,
the unit is using its default IP address, 169.254.128.132),
follow the steps in the table to assign it a static IP address that
is valid on your network:
2-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Step
Action
1.
Highlight the entry for the AP you want
to configure.
2.
Click the Change button.
Result: The Change screen appears.
Scan Tool Change Screen
1 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-23
Initialization
Step
Action
3.
Set IP Address Type to Static.
4.
Enter a static IP Address for the AP in
the field provided. You must assign the
unit a unique address that is valid on
your IP subnet. Contact your network
administrator if you need assistance
selecting an IP address for the unit.
5.
Enter your network’s Subnet Mask in
the field provided.
6.
Enter your network’s Gateway IP
Address in the field provided.
7.
Enter the SNMP Read/Write password
in the Read/Write Password field (for
new units, the default SNMP Read/Write
password is “public”).
NOTE:
The TFTP Server IP Address and
Image File Name fields are only
available if ScanTool detects that
the AP does not have a valid
software image installed. See Client
Connection Problems.
2 of 3
2-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Step
8.
Action
Click OK to save your changes.
Result: The Access Point will reboot
automatically and any changes you
made will take effect.
9.
When prompted, click OK a second time
to return to the Scan List screen.
10.
Click Cancel to close the ScanTool.
11.
Proceed to Setup Wizard for information
on how to access the HTTP interface.
3 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-25
Initialization
Setup Wizard
The first time you connect to an AP’s HTTP interface, the Setup Wizard
launches automatically. The Setup Wizard provides step-by-step
instructions for how to configure the Access Point’s basic operating
parameter, such as Network Name, IP parameters, system parameters,
and management passwords.
Setup Wizard Instructions
Follow these steps to access the Access Point’s HTTP interface and
launch the Setup Wizard:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer.
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
2. If necessary, disable the browser’s Internet proxy settings. For
Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
a. Select Tools > Internet Options....
b. Click the Connections tab.
c. Click LAN Settings....
d. If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy
server box.
2-26
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
e. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet
Explorer.
3. Enter the Access Point’s IP address in the browser’s Address field
and press Enter.
This is either the
— dynamic IP address assigned by a network DHCP server or
— the static IP address you manually configured.
See ScanTool for information on how to determine the unit’s IP
address and manually configure a new IP address, if necessary.
— Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears.
4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field. Leave the User
Name field blank. For new units, the default HTTP password is
“public”.
— Result: The Setup Wizard will launch automatically. An
example of the Password dialog and the Setup Wizard page
are shown next.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-27
Initialization
Figure 2-9.
2-28
Enter Network Password
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Figure 2-10.
Setup Wizard
5. Click Setup Wizard to begin. If you want to configure the AP
without using the Setup Wizard, click Exit and see Advanced
Configuration.
The Setup Wizard supports the following navigation options:
— Save & Next Button: Each Setup Wizard screen has a Save
& Next button. Click this button to submit any changes you
made to the unit’s parameters and continue to the next page.
The instructions described next shown how to navigate the
Setup Wizard using the Save & Next buttons.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-29
Initialization
— Navigation Panel: The Setup Wizard provides a navigation
panel on the left-hand side of the screen. Click the link that
corresponds to the parameters you want to configure to be
taken to that particular configuration screen. Note that clicking
a link in the navigation panel will not submit any changes you
made to the unit’s configuration on the current page.
— Exit: The navigation panel also includes an Exit option. Click
this link to close the Setup Wizard at any time.
! CAUTION:
If you exit from the Setup Wizard, any changes you submitted (by clicking
the Save & Next button) up to that point will be saved to the unit but will
not take effect until it is rebooted.
6. Configure the System Configuration settings and click Save &
Next. See System for more information.
7. Configure the Access Point’s Basic IP address settings, if
necessary, and click Save & Next. See Basic IP Parameters for
more information.
2-30
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
8. Assign the AP new passwords to prevent unauthorized access and
click Save & Next. Each management interface has its own
password:
— SNMP Read Password
— SNMP Read-Write Password
— SNMPv3 Authentication Password
— SNMPv3 Privacy Password
— CLI Password
— HTTP (Web) Password
By default, each of these passwords is set to “public”. See
Passwords for more information.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-31
Initialization
9. Configure the basic wireless interface settings and click Save &
Next.
— The following options are available for an 802.11a AP:
Option
Description
Primary Network
Name (SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2
and 31 characters long) for the
wireless network. You must configure
each wireless client to use this name
as well.
Additional Network
Names (SSIDs)
The AP supports up to 16 SSIDs and
VLANs per wireless interface (radio).
Refer to the Advanced Configuration
chapter for information on the
detailed rules on configuring multiple
SSIDs, VLANs, and security modes.
1 of 4
2-32
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Auto Channel Select
Description
By default, the AP scans the area for
other Access Points and selects the
best available communication
channel, either a free channel (if
available) or the channel with the
least amount of interference.
Remove the check mark to disable
this option. Note that you cannot
disable Auto Channel Select for
802.11a products in Europe (see
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)
for details).
2 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-33
Initialization
Option
Description
Frequency Channel
When Auto Channel Select is
enabled, this field is read-only and
displays the Access Point’s current
operating channel. When Auto
Channel Select is disabled, you can
specify the Access Point’s channel. If
you decide to manually set the unit’s
channel, ensure that nearby devices
do not use the same frequency.
Available Channels vary based on
regulatory domain. See 802.11a
Channel Frequencies. Note that you
cannot manually set the channel for
802.11a products in Europe (see
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)
for details).
Transmit Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select a
specific transmit rate for the AP.
Choose between 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36,
48, 54 Mbits/s, and Auto Fallback.
The Auto Fallback feature allows the
AP to select the best transmit rate
based on the cell size.
3 of 4
2-34
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Description
WEP Encryption
Place a check mark in the box
provided to enable WEP encryption.
See WEP Encryption for more
information.
Set Encryption Key
1
If you enabled Encryption, configure
an Encryption Key. This key is used
to encrypt and decrypt data between
the AP and its wireless clients. Enter
the number of characters that
correspond to the desired key size,
as described below:
• Enter 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5
ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart) to use 64-bit
encryption.
• Enter 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII
characters to use 128-bit
encryption.
• Enter 32 hexadecimal
characters or 16 ASCII
characters to use 152-bit
encryption.
4 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-35
Initialization
— The following options are available for an 802.11b AP:
Option
Description
Primary Network
Name (SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2
and 31 characters long) for the
wireless network. You must configure
each wireless client to use this name
as well.
Additional Network
Names (SSIDs)
The AP supports up to 16 SSIDs and
VLANs per wireless interface (radio).
Refer to the Advanced Configuration
chapter for information on the
detailed rules on configuring multiple
SSIDs, VLANs, and security modes.
Auto Channel Select
By default, the AP scans the area for
other Access Points and selects the
best available communication
channel, either a free channel (if
available) or the channel with the
least amount of interference.
Remove the check mark to disable
this option. If you are setting up a
Wireless Distribution System (WDS),
it must be disabled. See Wireless
Distribution System (WDS) for more
information.
1 of 4
2-36
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Description
Frequency Channel
When Auto Channel Select is
enabled, this field is read-only and
displays the Access Point’s current
operating channel. When Auto
Channel Select is disabled, you can
specify the Access Point’s operating
channel. If you decide to manually
set the unit’s channel, ensure that
nearby devices do not use the same
frequency (unless you are setting up
a WDS). Available Channels vary
based on regulatory domain. See
802.11b Channel Frequencies.
Distance Between
APs
Set to Large, Medium, Small,
Microcell, or Minicell depending on
the site survey for your system. The
distance value is related to the
Multicast Rate (described next). In
general, a larger distance between
APs means that your clients operate
a slower data rates (on average).
See Distance Between APs for more
information.
2 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-37
Initialization
Option
Multicast Rate
Description
Sets the rate at which Multicast
messages are sent. This value is
related to the Distance Between
APs parameter (described
previously). The table below displays
the possible Multicast Rates based
on the Distance between APs. See
Multicast Rate for more information.
Distance
between APs
Multicast Rate
Large
1 and 2 Mbits/sec
Medium
1, 2, and 5.5
Mbits/sec
Small
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
Minicell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
Microcell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
3 of 4
2-38
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Description
WEP Encryption
Place a check mark in the box
provided to enable WEP encryption.
See WEP Encryption for more
information.
Set Encryption Key
1
If you enabled Encryption, configure
an Encryption Key. This key is used
to encrypt and decrypt data between
the AP and its wireless clients. Enter
the number of characters that
correspond to the desired key size,
as described below:
• Enter 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5
ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart) to use 64-bit
encryption.
• Enter 26 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 13
ASCII characters to use 128-bit
encryption
4 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-39
Initialization
— The following options are available for an 802.11b/g AP:
Option
Operational Mode
Description
An 802.11b/g wireless interface can
be configured to operate in the
following modes:
• 802.11b mode only
• 802.11g mode only
• 802.11g-wifi mode
• 802.11b/g mode (default)
Primary Network
Name (SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2
and 31 characters long) for the
wireless network. You must
configure each wireless client to use
this name as well.
Additional Network
Names (SSIDs)
The AP supports up to 16 SSIDs and
VLANs per wireless interface (radio).
Refer to the Advanced Configuration
chapter for information on the
detailed rules on configuring multiple
SSIDs, VLANs, and security modes.
1 of 5
2-40
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Description
Auto Channel Select
By default, the AP scans the area for
other Access Points and selects the
best available communication
channel, either a free channel (if
available) or the channel with the
least amount of interference.
Remove the check mark to disable
this option.
Frequency Channel
When Auto Channel Select is
enabled, this field is read-only and
displays the Access Point’s current
operating channel. When Auto
Channel Select is disabled, you can
specify the Access Point’s channel. If
you decide to manually set the unit’s
channel, ensure that nearby devices
do not use the same frequency.
Available Channels vary based on
regulatory domain. See 802.11g
Channel Frequencies.
2 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-41
Initialization
Option
Transmit Rate
Description
Select a specific transmit rate for the
AP. The values available depend on
the Operational Mode. Auto Fallback
is the default setting; it allows the AP
to select the best transmit rate based
on the cell size.
• For 802.11b only -- Auto
Fallback, 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11g only -- Auto
Fallback, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36,
48, 54 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11b/g and
802.11g-wifi-- Auto Fallback, 1,
2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36,
48, 54 Mbits/sec
WEP Encryption
Place a check mark in the box
provided to enable WEP encryption.
See WEP Encryption for more
information.
3 of 5
2-42
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Initialization
Option
Set Encryption Key 1
Description
If you enabled Encryption, configure
an Encryption Key. This key is used
to encrypt and decrypt data between
the AP and its wireless clients. Enter
the number of characters that
correspond to the desired key size,
as described below:
• Enter 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5
ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart) to use 64-bit
encryption.
• Enter 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII
characters to use 128-bit
encryption.
• Enter 32 hexadecimal
characters or 16 ASCII
characters to use 152-bit
encryption.
4 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-43
Initialization
Option
Set Encryption Key 1
(continued)
Description
NOTE:
Additional advanced settings
are available in the Wireless
Interface Configuration
screen. See Wireless (802.11a),
Wireless (802.11b), or Wireless
(802.11b/g) for details. See
Security for more information on
security features.
5 of 5
10. Review the configuration summary. If you want to make any
additional changes, use the navigation panel on the left-hand side
of the screen to return to an earlier screen. After making a change,
click Save & Next to save the change and proceed to the next
screen.
11. When finished, click Reboot on the Summary screen to restart the
AP and apply your changes.
2-44
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Download the Latest Software
Download the Latest Software
Avaya periodically releases updated software for the AP on its Web site at
http://www.avaya.com/support. Avaya recommends that you check the
Web site for the latest updates after you have installed and initialized the
unit.
Three types of files can be downloaded to the AP from a TFTP server:
• image (AP software image or kernel)
• config (configuration file)
• bspBl (BSP/Bootloader firmware file)
Setup your TFTP Server
A Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server allows you to transfer files
across a network. You can
• upload files from the AP for backup or copying, and
• download the files for configuration and AP Image upgrades.
The Solarwinds TFTP server software is located on the Avaya Wireless
AP Installation CD-ROM. You can also download the latest TFTP
software from Solarwind’s Web site at http://www.solarwinds.net.
NOTE:
If a TFTP server is not available in the network, you can perform
similar file transfer operations using the HTTP interface.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-45
Download the Latest Software
After the TFTP server is installed:
• Check to see that TFTP is configured to point to the directory
containing the AP Image.
• Make sure you have the proper TFTP server IP address, the proper
AP Image file name, and that the TFTP server is operational.
• Make sure the TFTP server is configured to both Transmit and
Receive files, with no automatic shutdown or time-out.
Download Updates from a TFTP Server using the Web Interface
1. Download the latest software from http://www.avaya.com/support.
2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server.
3. In the Web Interface, click the Commands button and select the
Download tab.
4. Enter the IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided.
5. Enter the File Name (including the file extension). Enter the full
directory path and file name. If the file is located in the default
TFTP directory, you need enter only the file name.
6. Select the File Type from the drop-down menu (use Img for
software updates).
7. Select Download & Reboot from the File Operation drop-down
menu.
8. Click OK.
9. The Access Point will reboot automatically when the download is
complete.
2-46
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
Download Updates from a TFTP Server using the CLI Interface
1. Download the latest software from http://www.avaya.com/support.
2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server.
3. Open the CLI interface via Telnet or a serial connection.
4. Enter the CLI password when prompted.
5. Enter the command: download <tftpaddr> <filename> img
— Result: The download will begin. Be patient while the image is
downloaded to the Access Point.
6. When the download is complete, type reboot 0 and press Enter.
NOTE:
See The Command Line Interface for more information.
Additional Hardware Features
• Mounting Options
• Installing the AP in a Plenum
• Kensington Security Slot
• Power over Ethernet
• LED Indicators
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-47
Additional Hardware Features
Mounting Options
There are three mounting options for the AP, described below.
Desktop Mount
This is the standard installation for the AP. See Hardware Installation for
instructions.
Wall Mount
Follow these steps to mount the AP on a wall:
1. Identify the location where you intend to mount the unit.
NOTE:
For best results, mount the unit vertically. In other words, the
antenna should be pointing up or down but not sideways.
2. Unplug the Access Point’s power supply, if necessary.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the metal base from the
underside of the AP, if necessary.
4. Press down on the cable cover lock to release the cable cover.
See Unlock the Cable Cover for an illustration.
5. Remove the cable cover from the unit. See Remove Cable Cover
for an illustration.
2-48
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
6. Remove the front cover from the unit. See Remove the Front
Cover for an illustration.
7. Remove the back cover from the unit. See Remove the Back
Cover for an illustration.
8. Place the back cover on the mounting location and mark the center
of the three mounting holes.
9. Remove the cover from the wall and drill a hole at each of the
locations you marked above. Each hole should be wide enough to
hold a mounting plug (which is 6 mm x 35 mm).
10. Insert a plug into each hole. The AP comes with four 6 mm x 35
mm plugs; you only need to use three of these when wall mounting
the unit.
11. Insert a screw into each of the mounting holes molded into the
back cover. The AP comes with four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head
screws; you only need to use three of these when wall mounting
the unit.
12. Insert the screws into the wall plugs. Use a screwdriver to tighten
the screws and attach the back cover to the wall. In the following
example, the back cover is mounted upside down (the two holes
are at the bottom).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-49
Additional Hardware Features
Figure 2-11.
Attach the Back Cover to the Wall
13. Attach Ethernet and power cables to the AP unit, if necessary.
2-50
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
14. Snap the unit into the back cover. In the following example, the unit
is mounted upside down and its antenna is facing down.
Figure 2-12.
AP Mounted on a Wall
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-51
Additional Hardware Features
15. Replace the front cover.
16. Replace the cable cover.
17. Turn on the AP.
Ceiling Mount
Follow these steps to mount the AP to a ceiling:
1. Unplug the Access Point’s power supply, if necessary.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the metal base to the
underside of the AP, if necessary. SeeAttach the Metal Base for an
illustration.
3. Feed a mounting screw through each of the four rubber feet. The
AP comes with four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head screws.
4. Remove the screws from the rubber feet.
5. Turn the AP upside down position the base against the ceiling
where you want to mount the unit.
6. Mark the center of the four mounting holes in the rubber feet.
7. Set the AP aside and drill a hole at each of the locations you
marked above. Each hole should be wide enough to hold a
mounting plug (which is 6 mm x 35 mm).
8. Insert a plug into each hole. The AP comes with four 6 mm x 35
mm plugs.
9. Insert the screws into the holes you made previously in the rubber
feet.
2-52
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
10. Insert the screws into the wall plugs. Use a screwdriver to tighten
the screws and attach the Access Point’s metal base to the ceiling.
Figure 2-13.
Mounting the AP to the Ceiling
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-53
Additional Hardware Features
Installing the AP in a Plenum
In an office building, plenum is the space between the structural ceiling
and the tile ceiling that is provided to help air circulate. Many companies
also use the plenum to house communication equipment and cables.
However, these products and cables must comply with certain safety
requirements, such as Underwriter Labs (UL) Standard 2043: “Standard
for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products
and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces”.
The AP has been certified under UL Standard 2043 and can be installed
in the plenum only when the following conditions apply:
• The unit uses Power over Ethernet (PoE) to receive power over a
plenum-rated Category 5 Ethernet cable (the power cable must not
be connected to the unit).
• The unit’s plastic covers have been removed (this includes the cable
cover, the front cover, and the back cover).
Kensington Security Slot
The AP enclosure includes a Kensington Security Slot for use with a
Kensington locking mechanism. When properly installed, a Kensington
lock can prevent unauthorized personnel from stealing the AP. In
addition, the Kensington locks secures the cable cover in place, which
prevents tampering with the Ethernet and power cables.
2-54
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
The Kensington Security Slot is shown in the illustrations below (the
figure on the left shows the slot with the cable cover attached; the figure
on the right shows the slot with the cable cover removed). See
http://www.kensington.com for information on Kensington security
solutions.
Figure 2-14.
Kensington Security Slot
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-55
Additional Hardware Features
Power over Ethernet
An Power over Ethernet-enabled AP is equipped with an
802.3af-compliant Power over Ethernet module. Power over Ethernet
(PoE) delivers both data and power to the access point over a single
Ethernet cable. If you choose to use Power over Ethernet, there is no
difference in operation; the only difference is in the power source.
• The Power over Ethernet (PoE) integrated module receives ~48
VDC over a standard Category 5 Ethernet cable.
• To use Power over Ethernet, you must have an PoE hub (also
known as a power injector) connected to the network.
• The cable length between the PoE hub and the Access Point should
not exceed 100 meters (approximately 325 feet).
• The PoE hub is not a repeater and does not amplify the Ethernet
data signal.
• If connected to an PoE hub and an AC power simultaneously, the
Access Point draws power from Power over Ethernet.
• Maximum power supplied to an Access Point is 11 Watts; the unit
typically draws approximately 10 Watts.
Also see Hardware Specifications.
NOTE:
The AP’s 802.3af-compliant Power over Ethernet module is
backwards compatible with all Avaya Wireless Power over Ethernet
hubs that do not support the IEEE 802.3af standard.
2-56
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
LED Indicators
The AP has four LED indicators. The LEDs are identified in LED
Indicators Illustrated and exhibit the following behavior:
Power
Ethernet
Link
Ethernet
Activity
Wireless
Activity
Indication
Solid
Green
Green
when link
exists
Green
flash
with
data
activity
Green
flash
with data
activity
Normal Operation
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Rebooting/Power on Self Test
(POST)
Solid
Green
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Reset to Factory Defaults
command issued
Solid Red
Off
Off
Off
SDRAM Test Failure
1 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-57
Additional Hardware Features
Power
Ethernet
Link
Ethernet
Activity
Wireless
Activity
Indication
Solid Red
Green
Off
Off
If the AP is configured to get
an IP address from a DHCP
server, it may take up to two
minutes to obtain the
address. The Power LED will
be red and if there is an
Ethernet link the Ethernet
Link LED will be green during
the time the AP is trying to
obtain an address. Once an
address is obtained, the
Power LED will turn green.
Blinking
Red
Blinking
Red or Off
Blinking
Red
Off
Hardware Timer Test Failure
Blinking
Red
Off
Off
Blinking
Red
Flash Test Failure
Solid Red
Blinking
Red or Off
Solid
Red
Off
Ethernet Test Failure
Solid Red
Off
Off
Solid Red
Wireless Test Failure
Blinking
Amber
Blinking
Amber or
Off
Blinking
Amber
or Off
Off
Missing or bad AP image
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Solid
Amber
Missing or bad bootloader
image (all LEDs remain solid
amber)
2 of 3
2-58
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Additional Hardware Features
Power
Ethernet
Link
Ethernet
Activity
Wireless
Activity
Indication
n/a
n/a
n/a
Red
Wireless radio is not working
properly
n/a
n/a
Amber
Amber
Indicated interface in
administrative down state
3 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-59
Additional Hardware Features
Figure 2-15.
LED Indicators Illustrated
Power LED
Ethernet Link
LED
Ethernet Activity
LED
Wireless Activity
LED
2-60
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Related Topics
Related Topics
The Setup Wizard helps you configure the basic AP settings required to
get the unit up and running. The AP supports many other configuration
and management options. The remainder of this user guide describes
these options in detail.
• See Advanced Configuration for information on configuration
options that are available within the Access Point’s HTTP interface.
• See Monitor Information for information on the statistics displayed
within the Access Point’s HTTP interface.
• See Commands for information on the commands supported by the
Access Point’s HTTP interface.
• See Troubleshooting for troubleshooting suggestions.
• See The Command Line Interface for information on the CLI
interface and for a list of CLI commands.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
2-61
Related Topics
2-62
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Status Information
3
In This Chapter
• Logging into the HTTP Interface
• System Status
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Once the AP has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may
use your web browser to monitor the system status.
Follow these steps to monitor an AP’s operating statistics using the HTTP
interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer.
NOTE:
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet
Explorer users, follow these steps:
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
3-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface
— Select Tools > Internet Options....
— Click the Connections tab.
— Click LAN Settings....
— If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy
server box.
— Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet
Explorer.
3. Enter the Access Point’s IP address in the browser’s Address field
and press Enter.
— Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears.
4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK.
Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password
is “public”).
— Result: The System Status screen appears.
3-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
System Status
Figure 3-1.
Enter Network Password Screen
System Status
System Status is the first screen to appear each time you connect to the
HTTP interface. You can also return to this screen by clicking the Status
button.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
3-3
System Status
Figure 3-2.
3-4
System Status Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
System Status
Each section of the System Status screen provides the following
information:
— System Status: This area provides system level information,
including the unit’s IP address and contact information. See
System for information on these settings.
— System Alarms: System traps (if any) appear in this area.
Each trap identifies a specific severity level: Critical, Major,
Minor, and Informational. See Alarms for a list of possible
alarms.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
3-5
System Status
3-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Advanced
Configuration
4
In This Chapter
• Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS Interface
• System: Configure specific system information such as system name
and contact information.
• Network: Configure IP settings, DNS client, DHCP server, and Link
Integrity.
• Interfaces: Configure the Access Point’s interfaces: Wireless and
Ethernet. Also describes configuring a Wireless Distribution System
(WDS).
• Management: Configure the Access Point’s management
Passwords, IP Access Table, and Services such as configuring
secure or restricted access to the AP via SNMPv3, HTTPS, CLI, or
Automatic Configuration.
• Filtering: Configure Ethernet Protocol filters, Static MAC Address
filters, Advanced filters, and Port filters.
• Alarms: Configure the Alarm (SNMP Trap) Groups, the Alarm Host
Table, and the Syslog features.
• Bridge: Configure the Spanning Tree Protocol, Storm Threshold
protection, Intra BSS traffic, and Packet Forwarding.
• Security: Configure security features such as MAC Access Control,
WPA, WEP Encryption, and 802.1x. Configure Rogue Access Point
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-1
Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS Interface
Detection (RAD) and define the Scan Interval. Configure up to 16
VLAN and SSID pairs per wireless interface, and define the security
mode for each pair.
• RADIUS: Configure RADIUS features such as RADIUS Access
Control and Accounting.
Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS
Interface
Follow these steps to configure an Access Point’s operating settings
using the HTTP/HTTPS interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer.
NOTE:
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet
Explorer users, follow these steps:
— Select Tools > Internet Options....
— Click the Connections tab.
— Click LAN Settings....
4-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS Interface
— If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy
server box.
— Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet
Explorer.
3. Enter the Access Point’s IP address in the browser’s Address field
and press Enter.
— Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears.
4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK.
Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password
is “public”).
— Result: The System Status screen appears.
Figure 4-1.
Enter Network Password Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-3
Configuring the AP Using the HTTP/HTTPS Interface
5. Click the Configure button located on the left-hand side of the
screen.
Figure 4-2.
Configure Main Screen
6. Click the tab that corresponds to the parameter you want to
configure. For example, click Network to configure the
Access Point’s TCP/IP settings. The parameters contained in each
of the configuration categories are described later in this chapter.
7. Configure the Access Point’s parameters as necessary. After
changing a configuration value, click OK to save the change.
4-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
System
8. Reboot the Access Point for all of the changes to take effect.
System
You can configure and view the following parameters within the System
Configuration screen:
Parameters
Description
Name
The name assigned to the AP. Refer to
Dynamic DNS Support and Access Point
System Naming Convention for rules on
naming the AP.
Location
The location where the AP is installed.
Contact Name
The name of the person responsible for the
AP.
Contact Email
The email address of the person
responsible for the AP.
Contact Phone
The telephone number of the person
responsible for the AP.
Object ID
This is a read-only field that displays the
Access Point’s MIB definition; this
information is useful if you are managing
the AP using SNMP.
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-5
System
Parameters
Description
Ethernet MAC
Address
This is a read-only field that displays the
unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address for the Access Point’s Ethernet
interface. The MAC address is assigned at
the factory.
Descriptor
This is a read-only field that reports the
Access Point’s name, serial number,
current image software version, and current
bootloader software version.
Up Time
This is a read-only field that displays how
long the Access Point has been running
since its last reboot.
2 of 2
Dynamic DNS Support
DNS is a distributed database mapping the user readable names and IP
addresses (and more) of every registered system on the Internet.
Dynamic DNS is a lightweight mechanism which allows for modification of
the DNS data of host systems whose IP addresses change dynamically.
Dynamic DNS is usually used in conjunction with DHCP for assigning
meaningful names to host systems whose IP addresses change
dynamically.
4-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
System
Access Points provide DDNS support by adding the host name (option
12) in DHCP Client messages, which is used by the DHCP server to
dynamically update the DNS server.
Access Point System Naming Convention
The Access Point's system name is used as its host name. In order to
prevent Access Points with default configurations from registering similar
host names in DNS, the default system name of the Access Point is
uniquely generated. Access Points generate unique system names by
appending the last 3 bytes of the Access Point's MAC address to the
default system name.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-7
System
The system name must be compliant with the encoding rules for host
name as per DNS RFC 1123. The DNS host name encoding rules are:
• Characters have to alphanumeric or hyphen.
• The name cannot start or end with a hyphen.
• The name cannot start with a digit.
• The number of characters has to be 63 or less. (Currently the system
name length is limited to 32 bytes).
Image upgrades could cause the system to boot with an older system
name format that is not DNS compliant. To prevent problems with
dynamic DNS after an image upgrade, the system name will automatically
be converted to a DNS compliant system name.
The rules of conversion of older system names are:
• If the length is greater than 63 then the string is truncated. (This will
not happen since the system name is anyway limited to 32 bytes)
• All invalid characters at the beginning or end of the string are
replaced with the character 'X'.
• All other invalid characters are replaced with hyphens.
4-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
Network
The Network category contains three sub-categories.
• IP Configuration
• DHCP Server
• Link Integrity
IP Configuration
You can configure and view the following parameters within the IP
Configuration screen:
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point in order for any changes to the
Basic IP or DNS Client parameters take effect.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-9
Network
Basic IP Parameters
Parameter
Description
IP Address
Assignment Type
Set this parameter to Dynamic to configure
the Access Point as a Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client; the
Access Point will obtain IP settings from a
network DHCP server automatically during
boot-up. If you do not have a DHCP server or
if you want to manually configure the
Access Point’s IP settings, set this parameter
to Static.
IP Address
The Access Point’s IP address. When IP
Address Assignment Type is set to Dynamic,
this field is read-only and reports the unit’s
current IP address. The Access Point will
default to 169.254.128.132 if it cannot obtain
an address from a DHCP server.
1 of 2
4-10
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
Parameter
Description
Subnet Mask
The Access Point’s subnet mask. When IP
Address Assignment Type is set to Dynamic,
this field is read-only and reports the unit’s
current subnet mask. The subnet mask will
default to 255.255.0.0 if the unit cannot
obtain one from a DHCP server.
Gateway IP
Address
The IP address of the Access Point’s
gateway. When IP Address Assignment Type
is set to Dynamic, this field is read-only and
reports the IP address of the unit’s gateway.
The gateway IP address will default to
169.254.128.133 if the unit cannot obtain an
address from a DHCP server.
2 of 2
DNS Client
If you prefer to use host names to identify network servers rather than IP
addresses, you can configure the AP to act as a Domain Name Service
(DNS) client. When this feature is enabled, the Access Point contacts the
network’s DNS server to translate a host name to the appropriate network
IP address. You can use this DNS Client functionality to identify RADIUS
servers by host name. See RADIUS for details.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-11
Network
Parameter
Description
Enable DNS Client
Place a check mark in the box provided to
enable DNS client functionality. Note that this
option must be enabled before you can
configure the other DNS Client parameters.
DNS Primary
Server IP Address
The IP address of the network’s primary DNS
server.
DNS Secondary
Server IP Address
The IP address of a second DNS server on
the network. The Access Point will attempt to
contact the secondary server if the primary
server is unavailable.
DNS Client Default
Domain Name
The default domain name for the
Access Point’s network (for example,
“avaya.com”). Contact your network
administrator if you need assistance setting
this parameter.
Advanced
Default TTL (Time to Live): Time to Live (TTL) is a field in an IP packet
that specifies how long in seconds the packet can remain active on the
network. The Access Point uses the default TTL for packets it generates
for which the transport layer protocol does not specify a TTL value. This
parameter supports a range from 0 to 65535. By default, TTL is 64.
4-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
DHCP Server
If your network does not have a DHCP Server, you can configure the AP
as a DHCP server to assign dynamic IP addresses to Ethernet nodes and
wireless clients.
! CAUTION:
Make sure there are no other DHCP servers on the network and do not
enable the DHCP server without checking with your network administrator
first, as it could bring down the whole network. Also, the AP must be configured with a static IP address before enabling this feature.
When the DHCP Server functionality is enabled, you can create one or
more IP address pools from which to assign addresses to network
devices.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-13
Network
Figure 4-3.
4-14
DHCP Server Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
You can configure and view the following parameters within the DHCP
Server Configuration screen:
Parameter
Enable DHCP
Server
Description
Place a check mark in the box provided to
enable DHCP Server functionality.
NOTE:
You cannot enable the DHCP Server
functionality unless there is at least one
IP Pool Table Entry configured.
Subnet Mask
This field is read-only and reports the
Access Point’s current subnet mask. DHCP
clients that receive dynamic addresses from
the AP will be assigned this same subnet
mask.
Gateway IP
Address
The AP will assign the specified address to
its DHCP clients.
Primary DNS IP
Address
The AP will assign the specified address to
its DHCP clients.
Secondary DNS IP
Address
The AP will assign the specified address to
its DHCP clients.
1 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-15
Network
Parameter
Number of IP Pool
Table Entries
Description
This is a read-only field that reports the
number of IP address pools currently
configured.
2 of 4
4-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
Parameter
IP Pool Table
Entry
Description
This entry specifies a range of IP addresses
that the AP can assign to its wireless clients.
Click Add to create a new entry. Click Edit to
change an existing entry. Each entry contains
the following field:
• Start IP Address
• End IP Address
• Default Lease Time (optional): The
default time value for clients to retain the
assigned IP address. DHCP
automatically renews IP Addresses
without client notification. This
parameter supports a range between
3600 and 86400 seconds. The default is
86400 seconds.
• Maximum Lease Time (optional): The
maximum time value for clients to retain
the assigned IP address. DHCP
automatically renews IP Addresses
without client notification. This
parameter supports a range between
3600 and 86400 seconds. The default is
86400 seconds.
• Comment (optional)
3 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-17
Network
Parameter
IP Pool Table
Entry
(continued)
Description
Status: IP Pools are enabled upon entry in
the table. You can also disable or delete
entries by changing this field’s value.
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point
before changes to any of these DHCP
server parameters take effect
4 of 4
Link Integrity
The Link Integrity feature checks the link between the AP and the nodes
on the Ethernet backbone. These nodes are listed by IP address in the
Link Integrity IP Address Table. The AP periodically pings the nodes
listed within the table. If the AP loses network connectivity (that is, the
ping attempts fail), the AP disables its wireless interface until the
connection is restored. This forces the unit’s wireless clients to switch to
another Access Point that still has a network connection. Note that this
feature does not affect WDS links (if applicable).
4-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Network
You can configure and view the following parameters within the Link
Integrity Configuration screen:
Parameter
Description
Enable Link
Integrity
Place a check mark in the box provided to
enable Link Integrity.
Poll Interval
(milliseconds)
The interval between link integrity checks.
Range is 500 - 15000 ms in increments of
500 ms; default is 500 ms.
Poll
Retransmissions
The number of times a poll should be
retransmitted before the link is considered
down. Range is 0 to 255; default is 5.
Target IP Address
Entry
This entry specifies the IP address of a host
on the network that the AP will periodically
poll to confirm connectivity. The table can
hold up to five entries. By default, all five
entries are set to 0.0.0.0. Click Edit to update
one or more entries. Each entry contains the
following field:
• Target IP Address
• Comment (optional)
• Status: Set this field to Enable to
specify that the Access Point should poll
this device. You can also disable an
entry by changing this field’s value to
Disable.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-19
Network
Figure 4-4.
4-20
Link Integrity Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Interfaces
From the Interfaces tab, you configure the Access Point’s operational
mode, power control settings, wireless interface settings and Ethernet
settings. You may also configure a Wireless Distribution System for
AP-to-AP communications.
For the wireless interface configuration, refer to the wireless parameters
below that correspond to your radio type.
• Operational Mode
• Wireless (802.11a)
• Wireless (802.11b)
• Wireless (802.11b/g)
• Wireless (802.11a/g)
• Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
• Ethernet
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-21
Interfaces
Operational Mode
You can configure and view the following parameters within the
Operational Mode screen.
• Operational Mode: the mode of communication between the
wireless clients and the Access Point:
— 802.11b only
— 802.11g only
— 802.11bg
— 802.11a (default)
— 802.11g-wifi
TX Power Control
The TX Power Control feature lets you configure the transmit power level
of the card in the AP at one of four levels:
• 100% of the maximum transmit power level of the card
• 50%
• 25%
• 12.5%
4-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Configuring TX Power Control
1. Click Configure > Interfaces > Operational Mode.
2. Select Enable Transmit Power Control.
3. Select the transmit power level for interface A from the Wireless-A:
Transmit Power Level drop-down menu.
4. Click OK.
Figure 4-5.
Operational Mode Screen - TX Power Control
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-23
Interfaces
Wireless (802.11a)
You can configure and view the following parameters within the Wireless
Interface Configuration screen for an 802.11a AP:
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these
parameters take effect.
Parameter
Description
Physical Interface
Type
For an 802.11a AP, this field reports:
“802.11a (OFDM 5 GHz).” OFDM stands for
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing;
this is the name for the radio technology used
by 802.11a devices.
MAC Address
This is a read-only field that displays the
unique MAC (Media Access Control) address
for the Access Point’s wireless interface. The
MAC address is assigned at the factory.
1 of 5
4-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Regulatory
Domain
Description
Reports the regulatory domain for which the
AP is certified. Not all features or channels
are available in all countries. The available
regulatory domains include:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, and
Australia
• ETSI - Europe and the United Kingdom
• MKK: Japan
• SG: Singapore
• ASIA: China and South Korea
• TW: Taiwan and Hong Kong
Network Name
(SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31
characters long) for the wireless network.
You must configure each wireless client to
use this name as well.
2 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-25
Interfaces
Parameter
Auto Channel
Select
Description
The AP scans the area for other
Access Points and selects a free or relatively
unused communication channel. This helps
prevent interference problems and increases
network performance. By default this feature
is enabled. See 802.11a Channel
Frequencies for a list of Channels.
NOTE:
You cannot disable Auto Channel Select for 802.11a
products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) for details).
Frequency
Channel
When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this
field is read-only and displays the
Access Point’s current operating Channel.
When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you
can specify the Access Point’s channel. If
you decide to manually set the unit’s
Channel, ensure that nearby devices do not
use the same frequency. Available Channels
vary based on regulatory domain. See
802.11a Channel Frequencies.
Note that you cannot manually set the
channel for 802.11a products in Europe (see
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for
details).
3 of 5
4-26
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
Transmit Rate
Use the drop-down menu to select a specific
transmit rate for the AP. Choose between 6,
9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/s, and Auto
Fallback. Auto Fallback is the default setting;
it allows the AP unit to select the best
transmit rate based on the cell size.
DTIM Period
The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is
used with clients that have power
management enabled. DTIM should be left at
1, the default value, if any clients have power
management enabled. This parameter
supports a range between 1 and 255.
4 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-27
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
This parameter affects message flow control
and should not be changed under normal
circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set
to a value between 0 and 2347, the
Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism
for packets that are the specified size or
greater. When set to 2347 (the default
setting), RTS/CTS is disabled. See RTS/CTS
Medium Reservation for more information.
Closed System
Check this box to allow only clients
configured with the Access Point’s specific
Network Name to associate with the
Access Point. When enabled, a client
configured with the Network Name “ANY”
cannot connect to the AP. This option is
disabled by default.
5 of 5
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)
802.11a APs sold in Europe use a technique called Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) to automatically select an operating channel. During
boot-up, the AP scans the available frequency and selects a channel that
is free of interference. If the AP subsequently detects interference on its
channel, it automatically reboots and selects another channel that is free
of interference.
4-28
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
DFS only applies to 802.11a APs used in Europe (i.e., units whose
regulatory domain is set to ETSI). The European Telecommunications
Standard Institute (ETSI) requires that 802.11a devices use DFS to
prevent interference with radar systems and other devices that already
occupy the 5 GHz band.
If you are using an 802.11a AP in Europe, keep in mind the following:
• DFS is not a configurable parameter. It is always enabled and
cannot be disabled.
• You cannot manually select the device’s operating channel; you
must let DFS select the channel.
• You cannot configure the Auto Channel Select option. Within the
HTTP interface, this option always appears enabled.
RTS/CTS Medium Reservation
The 802.11 standard supports optional RTS/CTS communication based
on packet size. Without RTS/CTS, a sending radio listens to see if
another radio is already using the medium before transmitting a data
packet. If the medium is free, the sending radio transmits its packet.
However, there is no guarantee that another radio is not transmitting a
packet at the same time, causing a collision. This typically occurs when
there are hidden nodes (clients that can communicate with the
Access Point but are out of range of each other) in very large cells.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-29
Interfaces
When RTS/CTS occurs, the following occurs.
1. The sending radio first transmits a Request to Send (RTS) packet
to confirm that the medium is clear.
2. When the receiving radio successfully receives the RTS packet, it
transmits back a Clear to Send (CTS) packet to the sending radio.
3. When the sending radio receives the CTS packet, it sends the data
packet to the receiving radio. The RTS and CTS packets contain a
reservation time to notify other radios (including hidden nodes) that
the medium is in use for a specified period. This helps to minimize
collisions.
While RTS/CTS adds overhead to the radio network, it is particularly
useful for large packets that take longer to resend after a collision occurs.
RTS/CTS Medium Reservation is an advanced parameter and supports a
range between 0 and 2347 bytes. When set to 2347 (the default setting),
the RTS/CTS mechanism is disabled. When set to 0, the RTS/CTS
mechanism is used for all packets. When set to a value between 0 and
2347, the Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism for packets that
are the specified size or greater. You should not need to enable this
parameter for most networks unless you suspect that the wireless cell
contains hidden nodes.
4-30
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Wireless (802.11b)
You can configure and view the following parameters within the Wireless
Interface Configuration screen for an 802.11b AP:
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these
parameters take effect.
Parameter
Description
Physical Interface
Type
For 802.11b AP, this field reports: “802.11b
(DSSS 2.4 GHz).” DSSS stands for Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum; this is the name
for the radio technology used by 802.11b
devices.
MAC Address
This is a read-only field that displays the
unique MAC (Media Access Control) address
for the Access Point’s wireless interface. The
MAC address is assigned at the factory.
1 of 9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-31
Interfaces
Parameter
Regulatory
Domain
Description
Reports the regulatory domain for which the
AP is certified. Not all features or channels
are available in all countries. The available
regulatory domains include:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, and
Australia
• ETSI - Most of Europe, including the
United Kingdom, Ireland, Singapore,
and Hong Kong
• MKK: Japan
• IL - Israel
Network Name
(SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31
characters long) for the wireless network.
You must configure each wireless client to
use this name as well.
2 of 9
4-32
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
Auto Channel
Select
The AP scans the area for other
Access Points and selects a free or relatively
unused communication channel. This helps
prevent interference problems and increases
network performance. By default this feature
is enabled; see 802.11b Channel
Frequencies for a list of Channels. However,
if you are setting up a Wireless Distribution
System (WDS), it must be disabled. See
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for more
information.
Frequency
Channel
When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this
field is read-only and displays the
Access Point’s current operating channel.
When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you
can specify the Access Point’s operating
channel. If you decide to manually set the
unit’s channel, ensure that nearby devices do
not use the same frequency (unless you are
setting up a WDS). Available Channels vary
based on regulatory domain. See 802.11b
Channel Frequencies.
3 of 9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-33
Interfaces
Parameter
Distance Between
APs
Description
Set to Large, Medium, Small, Microcell, or
Minicell depending on the site survey for
your system. By default, this parameter is set
to Large. The distance value is related to the
Multicast Rate (described next). In general,
a larger distance between APs means that
your clients operate a slower data rates (on
average). See Distance Between APs for
more information.
4 of 9
4-34
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Multicast Rate
Description
Sets the rate at which Multicast messages
are sent. This value is related to the Distance
Between APs parameter (described
previously). The table below displays the
possible Multicast Rates based on the
Distance between APs setting. By default,
this parameter is set to 2 Mbits/sec. See
Multicast Rate for more information.
Distance
between APs
Multicast Rate
Large
1 and 2 Mbits/sec
Medium
1, 2, and 5.5
Mbits/sec
Small
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
Minicell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
Microcell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11
Mbits/sec
5 of 9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-35
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
DTIM Period
The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is
used with clients that have power
management enabled. DTIM should be left at
1, the default value, if any clients have power
management enabled. This parameter
supports a range between 1 and 255.
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
This parameter affects message flow control
and should not be changed under normal
circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set
to a value between 0 and 2347, the
Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism
for packets that are the specified size or
greater. When set to 2347 (the default
setting), RTS/CTS is disabled. See RTS/CTS
Medium Reservation for more information.
6 of 9
4-36
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
Interference
Robustness
Enable this option if other electrical devices in
the 2.4 GHz frequency band (such as a
microwave oven or a cordless phone) may be
interfering with the wireless signal. The AP
will automatically fragment large packets into
multiple smaller packets when interference is
detected to increase the likelihood that the
messages will be received in the presence of
interference. The receiving radio
reassembles the original packet once all
fragments have been received. This option is
disabled by default.
Closed System
Check this box to allow only clients
configured with the Access Point’s specific
Network Name to associate with the
Access Point. When enabled, a client
configured with the Network Name “ANY”
cannot connect to the AP. This option is
disabled by default.
7 of 9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-37
Interfaces
Parameter
Load Balancing
Description
Enable this option so clients can evaluate
which Access Point to associate with, based
on current AP loads. This feature is enabled
by default; it helps distribute the wireless load
between APs. This feature is not available if
you are using an Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a
non-Avaya Wireless client with the AP.
8 of 9
4-38
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Medium Density
Distribution
Description
When enabled, the Access Point
automatically notifies wireless clients of its
Distance Between APs, Interference
Robustness, and RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation settings. This feature is
enabled by default and allows clients to
automatically adopt the values used by its
current Access Point (even if these values
differ from the client’s default values or from
the values supported by other
Access Points).
NOTE:
This feature is not available if you are using an
Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a non-Avaya Wireless
client with the AP. Avaya recommends that you
leave this parameter enabled, particularly if you
have Avaya Wireless clients on your wireless
network (leaving this parameter enabled should not
adversely affect the performance of any
Avaya 802.11a/b Cards or non-Avaya Wireless
cards on your network).
9 of 9
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-39
Interfaces
Distance Between APs
Distance Between APs defines how far apart (physically) your AP devices
are located, which in turn determines the size of your cell. Cells of
different sizes have different capacities and, therefore, suit different
applications. For instance, a typical office has many stations that require
high bandwidth for complex, high-speed data processing. In contrast, a
typical warehouse has a few forklifts requiring low bandwidth for simple
transactions.
NOTE:
This feature is not available if you are using an
Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a non-Avaya Wireless client with the AP.
Cell capacities are compared in the following table, which shows that
small cells suit most offices and large cells suit most warehouses:
Small Cell
Physically accommodates few
stations
High cell bandwidth per station
High transmit rate
4-40
Large Cell
Physically accommodates many
stations
Lower cell bandwidth per station
Lower transmit rate
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Coverage
The number of Access Points in a set area determines the network
coverage for that area. A large number of Access Points covering a small
area is a high-density cell. A few Access Points, or even a single unit,
covering the same small area would result in a low-density cell, even
though in both cases the actual area did not change — only the number of
Access Points covering the area changed.
In a typical office, a high density area consists of a number of
Access Points installed every 20 feet and each Access Point generates a
small radio cell with a diameter of about 10 feet. In contrast, a typical
warehouse might have a low density area consisting of large cells (with a
diameter of about 90 feet) and Access Points installed every 200 feet.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-41
Interfaces
Figure 4-6.
Low Density vs. Ultra High Density Network
The Distance Between Cells parameter supports five values: Large,
Medium, Small, Minicell, and Microcell.
! CAUTION:
The distance between APs should not be approximated. It is calculated
by means of a manual Site Survey, in which an AP is set up and clients
are tested throughout the area to determine signal strength and coverage,
and local limits such as physical interference are investigated. From these
measurements the appropriate cell size and density is determined, and
the optimum distance between APs is calculated to suit your particular
business requirements. Contact your reseller for information on how to
conduct a Site Survey.
4-42
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Multicast Rate
The multicast rate determines the rate at which broadcast and multicast
packets are transmitted by the Access Point to the wireless network.
Stations that are closer to the Access Point can receive multicast packets
at a faster data rate than stations that are farther away from the AP.
You should set the Multicast Rate based on the size of the Access Point’s
cell.
If the Access Point’s cell is very small (for example, Distance Between
APs is set to Microcell), you can expect that all stations should be able to
successfully receive multicast packets at 11 MBits/sec so you can set
Multicast Rate to 11 Mbits/sec. However, if the Access Point’s cell is
large, you need to accommodate stations that may not be able to receive
multicast packets at the higher rates; in this case, you should set
Multicast Rate to 1 or 2 Mbits/sec.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-43
Interfaces
Figure 4-7.
1 Mbits/s and 11 Mbits/s Multicast Rates
11 Mbits/s
1 Mbit/s
NOTE:
There is an inter-dependent relationship between the Distance
between APs and the Multicast Rate. In general, larger systems
operate at a lower average transmit rate. The variation between
4-44
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Multicast Rate and Distance Between APs is presented in the
following table:
Large
Medium
Small
Minicell
Microcell
1.0 Mbit/s
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
2.0 Mbits/s
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
5.5 Mbits/s
yes
yes
yes
yes
11 Mbits/s
yes
yes
yes
The Distance Between APs must be set before the Multicast Rate,
because when you select the Distance Between APs, the appropriate
range of Multicast values automatically populates the drop-down
menu.This feature is not available if you are using an
Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a non-Avaya Wireless client with the AP.
Wireless (802.11b/g)
You can configure the following radio parameters for an 802.11b/g AP:
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these
parameters take effect.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-45
Interfaces
Parameter
Operational Mode
Description
An 802.11b/g wireless interface can be
configured to operate in the following modes:
• 802.11b mode only: The radio uses the
802.11b standard only.
• 802.11g mode only: The radio is
optimized to communicate with 802.11g
devices. This setting will provide the best
results if this radio interface will only
communicate with 802.11g devices.
• 802.11b/g mode: This is the default mode.
Use this mode if you want to support a mix
of 802.11b and 802.11g devices.
• 802.11g-wifi: This mode was developed
for Wi-Fi compliance testing purposes. It is
similar to 802.11g only mode.
In general, you should use either 802.11g only
mode (if you want to support 802.11g devices
only) or 802.11b/g mode to support a mix of
802.11b and 802.11g devices.
1 of 5
4-46
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Physical Interface
Type
Description
Depending on the Operational Mode, this field
reports:
• For 802.11b mode only: “802.11b
(CCK/DSSS 2.4 GHz)”
• For 802.11g and 802.11g-wifi modes:
“802.11g (OFDM/DSSS 2.4 GHz)”
• For 802.11b/g mode: “802.11b/g
(ERP-CCK/DSSS/OFDM 2.4 GHz)”
OFDM stands for Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiplexing; this is the name for the
radio technology used by 802.11a devices.
DSSS stands for Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum; this is the name for the radio
technology used by 802.11b devices.
MAC Address
This is a read-only field that displays the unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address for the
Access Point’s wireless interface. The MAC
address is assigned at the factory.
2 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-47
Interfaces
Parameter
Regulatory
Domain
Description
Reports the regulatory domain for which the AP
is certified. Not all features or channels are
available in all countries. The available
regulatory domains include:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, and Australia
• ETSI - Europe, including the United
Kingdom
• MKK - Japan
• IL - Israel
Network Name
(SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31
characters long) for the wireless network. You
must configure each wireless client to use this
name as well.
Auto Channel
Select
The AP scans the area for other Access Points
and selects a free or relatively unused
communication channel. This helps prevent
interference problems and increases network
performance. By default this feature is enabled;
see 802.11g Channel Frequencies for a list of
Channels.
3 of 5
4-48
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
Frequency
Channel
When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this field
is read-only and displays the Access Point’s
current operating channel. When Auto Channel
Select is disabled, you can specify the Access
Point’s operating channel. If you decide to
manually set the unit’s channel, ensure that
nearby devices do not use the same frequency
(unless you are setting up a WDS). Available
Channels vary based on regulatory domain.
See 802.11g Channel Frequencies.
Transmit Rate
Select a specific transmit rate for the AP. The
values available depend on the Operational
Mode. Auto Fallback is the default setting; it
allows the AP to select the best transmit rate
based on the cell size.
• For 802.11b only -- Auto Fallback, 1, 2,
5.5, 11 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11g only -- Auto Fallback, 6, 9,
12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11b/g and 802.11g-wifi -- Auto
Fallback, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36,
48, 54 Mbits/sec
4 of 5
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-49
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
DTIM Period
The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is
used with clients that have power management
enabled. DTIM should be left at 1, the default
value, if any clients have power management
enabled. This parameter supports a range
between 1 and 255.
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
This parameter affects message flow control
and should not be changed under normal
circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set to
a value between 0 and 2347, the Access Point
uses the RTS/CTS mechanism for packets that
are the specified size or greater. When set to
2347 (the default setting), RTS/CTS is disabled.
See RTS/CTS Medium Reservation for more
information.
Closed System
Check this box to allow only clients configured
with the Access Point’s specific Network Name
to associate with the Access Point. When
enabled, a client configured with the Network
Name “ANY” cannot connect to the AP. This
option is disabled by default.
5 of 5
4-50
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Wireless (802.11a/g)
You can configure and view the following parameters within the Wireless
Interface Configuration screen for an 802.11a/g AP:
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these
parameters take effect.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-51
Interfaces
Parameter
Operational Mode
Description
An 802.11a/g wireless interface can be
configured to operate in the following modes:
• 802.11b mode only: The radio uses the
802.11b standard only.
• 802.11g mode only: The radio is
optimized to communicate with 802.11g
devices. This setting will provide the
best results if this radio interface will
only communicate with 802.11g
devices.
• 802.11a mode only: The radio uses the
802.11a standard only.
• 802.11b/g mode: This is the default
mode. Use this mode if you want to
support a mix of 802.11b and 802.11g
devices.
• 802.11g-wifi: This mode was developed
for Wi-Fi compliance testing purposes. It
is similar to 802.11g only mode.
In general, you should use either 802.11g
only mode (if you want to support 802.11g
devices only) or 802.11b/g mode to support a
mix of 802.11b and 802.11g devices.
1 of 7
4-52
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Physical Interface
Type
Description
Depending on the Operational Mode, this
field reports:
• For 802.11b mode only: “802.11b
(CCK/DSSS 2.4 GHz)”
• For 802.11g and 802.11g-wifi modes:
“802.11g (OFDM/DSSS 2.4 GHz)”
• For 802.11b/g mode: “802.11b/g
(ERP-CCK/DSSS/OFDM 2.4 GHz)”
• For 802.11a mode only, this field
reports: “802.11a (OFDM 5 GHz).”
OFDM stands for Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiplexing; this is the name for the
radio technology used by 802.11a devices.
DSSS stands for Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum; this is the name for the radio
technology used by 802.11b devices.
MAC Address
This is a read-only field that displays the
unique MAC (Media Access Control) address
for the Access Point’s wireless interface. The
MAC address is assigned at the factory.
2 of 7
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-53
Interfaces
Parameter
Regulatory
Domain
Description
Reports the regulatory domain for which the
AP is certified. Not all features or channels
are available in all countries. The available
regulatory domains include:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, and
Australia
• ETSI - Europe and the United Kingdom
• MKK: Japan
• SG: Singapore
• ASIA: China and South Korea
• TW: Taiwan and Hong Kong
Network Name
(SSID)
Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31
characters long) for the wireless network.
You must configure each wireless client to
use this name as well.
3 of 7
4-54
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Auto Channel
Select
Description
The AP scans the area for other
Access Points and selects a free or relatively
unused communication channel. This helps
prevent interference problems and increases
network performance. By default this feature
is enabled. See 802.11a Channel
Frequencies and 802.11g Channel
Frequencies for a list of Channels.
NOTE:
You cannot disable Auto Channel Select for 802.11a
products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) for details).
4 of 7
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-55
Interfaces
Parameter
Frequency
Channel
Description
• When Auto Channel Select is enabled,
this field is read-only and displays the
Access Point’s current operating
Channel.
• When Auto Channel Select is disabled,
you can specify the Access Point’s
channel.
If you decide to manually set the unit’s
Channel, ensure that nearby devices do not
use the same frequency. Available Channels
vary based on regulatory domain. See
802.11a Channel Frequencies and 802.11g
Channel Frequencies.
NOTE:
You cannot manually set the channel for
802.11a products in Europe (see
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for
details).
5 of 7
4-56
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Parameter
Transmit Rate
Description
Select a specific transmit rate for the AP. The
values available depend on the Operational
Mode. Auto Fallback is the default setting; it
allows the AP to select the best transmit rate
based on the cell size. Use the drop-down
menu to select a specific transmit rate for the
AP.
• For 802.11b only -- Auto Fallback, 1, 2,
5.5, 11 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11g only -- Auto Fallback, 6, 9,
12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11b/g and 802.11g-wifi -- Auto
Fallback, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24,
36, 48, 54 Mbits/sec
• For 802.11a only -- Auto Fallback, 6, 9,
12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/s, and. Auto
Fallback is the default setting; it allows
the AP unit to select the best transmit
rate based on the cell size.
6 of 7
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-57
Interfaces
Parameter
Description
DTIM Period
The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is
used with clients that have power
management enabled. DTIM should be left at
1, the default value, if any clients have power
management enabled. This parameter
supports a range between 1 and 255.
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
This parameter affects message flow control
and should not be changed under normal
circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set
to a value between 0 and 2347, the
Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism
for packets that are the specified size or
greater. When set to 2347 (the default
setting), RTS/CTS is disabled. See RTS/CTS
Medium Reservation for more information.
Closed System
Check this box to allow only clients
configured with the Access Point’s specific
Network Name to associate with the
Access Point. When enabled, a client
configured with the Network Name “ANY”
cannot connect to the AP. This option is
disabled by default.
7 of 7
4-58
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
A Wireless Distribution System (WDS) creates a link between two
802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11b/g APs over their radio interfaces. This link
relays traffic from one AP that does not have Ethernet connectivity to a
second AP that has Ethernet connectivity. WDS allows you to configure
up to six (6) point-to-point links between Access Points.
In the WDS Example below, AP 1 and AP 2 communicate over a WDS
link (represented by the blue line). This link provides Client 1 with access
to network resources even though AP 1 is not directly connected to the
Ethernet network. Packets destined for or sent by the client are relayed
between the Access Points over the WDS link.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-59
Interfaces
Figure 4-8.
WDS Example
AP 2
AP 1
Client 1
4-60
Client 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Bridging WDS
Each WDS link is mapped to a logical WDS port on the AP. WDS ports
behave like Ethernet ports rather than like standard wireless interfaces:
on a BSS port, an Access Point learns by association and from frames;
on a WDS or Ethernet port, an Access Point learns from frames only.
When setting up a WDS, keep in mind the following:
• The WDS link shares the communication bandwidth with the clients.
Therefore, while the maximum data rate for the Access Point’s cell
is still 11 Mb, client throughput will decrease when the WDS link is
active.
• If there is no partner MAC address configured in the WDS table, the
WDS port remains disabled.
• Each WDS port on a single AP should have a unique partner MAC
address. Do not enter the same MAC address twice in an AP’s WDS
port list.
• Each Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the
same Channel setting to communicate with each other.
• Each Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the
same network domain.
• Each Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the
same WEP Encryption settings. WDS does not use 802.1x.
Therefore, if you want to encrypt the WDS link, you must configure
each Access Point to use WEP encryption (either WEP encryption
only or Mixed Mode), and each Access Point must have the same
Encryption Key(s). See Security.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-61
Interfaces
• If your network does not support spanning tree, be careful to avoid
creating network loops between APs. For example, creating a WDS
link between two Access Points connected to the same Ethernet
network will create a network loop (if spanning tree is disabled). For
more information, refer to the Spanning Tree section.
WDS Setup Procedure
NOTE:
You must disable Auto Channel Select to create a WDS. Each
Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the same
Channel setting to communicate with each other.
To setup a wireless backbone follow the steps below for each AP that you
wish to include in the Wireless Distribution System.
1. Confirm that Auto Channel Select is disabled.
2. Write down the MAC Address of the radio that you wish to include
in the Wireless Distribution System.
3. Open the Wireless Interface Configuration screen.
4. Scroll down to the Wireless Distribution System heading.
5. Click the Edit button to update the Wireless Distribution System
(WDS) Table.
6. Enter the MAC Address that you wrote down in Step 2 in one of the
Partner MAC Address field of the Wireless Distribution Setup
window.
7. Set the Status of the device to Enable.
4-62
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
8. Click OK.
9. Reboot the AP.
Figure 4-9.
WDS Configuration
NOTE:
To set up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS) with 802.1x, set
each Access Point’s 802.1x Security Mode to Mixed and assign
each unit in the WDS the same Encryption Key 1. See Security.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-63
Management
Ethernet
Select the desired speed and transmission mode from the drop-down
menu. Half-duplex means that only one side can transmit at a time and
full-duplex allows both sides to transmit. When set to auto-duplex, the AP
negotiates with its switch or hub to automatically select the highest
throughput option supported by both sides.
For best results, Avaya recommends that you configure the Ethernet
setting to match the speed and transmission mode of the device the
Access Point is connected to (such as a hub or switch). If in doubt, leave
this setting at its default, auto-speed-auto-duplex. Choose between:
• 10 Mbit/s - half duplex, full duplex, or auto duplex
• 100 Mbit/s - half duplex or full duplex
• auto speed - half duplex or auto duplex
Management
The Management category contains three sub-categories.
• Passwords
• IP Access Table
• Services
4-64
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Passwords
You can configure the following passwords:
Type
Description
SNMP Read
Password
For read access to the AP using SNMP.
Enter a password in both the Password
field and the Confirm field. The default
password is “public”.
SNMP Read/Write
Password
For read and write access to the AP using
SNMP. Enter a password in both the
Password field and the Confirm field. The
default password is “public”. This password
must be at least 6 characters in length.
SNMPv3
Authentication
Password
For sending authenticated SNMPv3
messages. Enter a password in both the
Password field and the Confirm field. The
default password is “public”. Password
length is recommended to be at least 8
characters. Secure Management (Services
tab) must be enabled to configure SNMPv3.
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-65
Management
Type
Description
SNMPv3 Privacy
Password
For sending encrypted SNMPv3 data. Enter
a password in both the Password field and
the Confirm field. The default password is
“public”. Password length is recommended
to be at least 8 characters. Secure
Management (Services tab) must be
enabled to configure SNMPv3.
Telnet (CLI)
Password
For the CLI interface (via serial or Telnet).
Enter a password in both the Password
field and the Confirm field. The default
password is “public”.
HTTP (Web)
Password
For the Web browser HTTP interface. Enter
a password in both the Password field and
the Confirm field. The default password is
“public”.
NOTE:
For security purposes Avaya recommends changing ALL
PASSWORDS from the default “public” immediately, to restrict
access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you
lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform
the Reset to Factory Default Procedure.
2 of 2
4-66
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
IP Access Table
The Management IP Access table limits in-band management access to
the IP addresses or range of IP addresses specified in the table. This
feature applies to all management options (SNMP, HTTP, and CLI)
except for CLI management over the serial port. To configure this table,
click Add and set the following parameters:
• IP Address: Enter the IP Address for the management station.
• IP Mask: Enter a mask that will act as a filter to limit access to a
range of IP Addresses based on the IP Address you already
entered.
— The IP mask 255.255.255.255 would authorize the single
station defined by the IP Address to configure the
Access Point. The AP would ignore commands from any other
IP address. In contrast, the IP mask 255.255.255.0 would
allow any device that shares the first three octets of the IP
address to configure the AP. For example, if you enter an IP
address of 10.20.30.1 with a 255.255.255.0 subnet mask, any
IP address between 10.20.30.1 and 10.20.30.254 will have
access to the AP’s management interfaces.
• Comment: Enter an optional comment, such as the station name.
To edit or delete an entry, click Edit. Edit the information, or select
Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status pull-down menu.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-67
Management
Services
You can configure the following management services:
• Secure Management
• SNMP Settings
• HTTP Access
• HTTPS Access (Secure Socket Layer)
• Telnet Configuration Settings
• Serial Configuration Settings
• Automatic Configuration
NOTE:
You must reboot the Access Point if you change the HTTP Port or
Telnet Port.
4-68
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Secure Management
Secure Management allows the use of encrypted and authenticated
communication protocols such as SNMPv3, and Secure Socket Link
(SSL), to manage the Access Point.
Setting
Enable Secure
Management
Description
Enables the further configuration of HTTPS
Access, and SNMPv3. After enabling
Secure Management, you can choose to
configure HTTPS (SSL) access on the
Services tab, and configure SNMPv3
passwords on the Passwords tab.
SNMP Settings
Setting
SNMP Interface
Bitmask
Description
Configure the interface or interfaces
(Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from
which you will manage the AP via SNMP.
You can also select Disabled to prevent a
user from accessing the AP via SNMP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-69
Management
HTTP Access
Setting
Description
HTTP Interface
Bitmap
Configure the interface or interfaces
(Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from
which you will manage the AP via the Web
interface. For example, to allow Web
configuration via the Ethernet network only,
set HTTP Interface Bitmask to Ethernet.
You can also select Disabled to prevent a
user from accessing the AP from the Web
interface.
HTTP Port
Configure the HTTP port from which you
will manage the AP via the Web interface.
By default, the HTTP port is 80.
Enable HTTP Setup
Wizard
The Setup Wizard appears automatically
the first time you access the HTTP
interface. If you exited out of the Setup
Wizard and want to relaunch it, enable this
option, click OK, and then close your
browser or reboot the AP. The Setup
Wizard will appear the next time you access
the HTTP interface.
4-70
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Figure 4-10.
Management Services Configuration Screen
HTTPS Access (Secure Socket Layer)
You can access the AP in a secure fashion using Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) over port 443. The AP supports SSLv3 with a 128-bit encryption
certificate maintained by the AP for secure communications between the
AP and the HTTP client. All communications are encrypted using the
server and the client-side certificate.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-71
Management
NOTE:
SSL requires Internet Explorer version 6, 128 bit encryption, Service
Pack 1, and patch Q323308.
The AP comes pre-installed with all required SSL files: default certificate
and private key installed.
Configuring Secure Socket Layer (SSL)
After enabling SSL, the only configurable parameter is the SSL
passphrase. The default SSL passphrase is
If you decide to upload a new certificate and private key (using TFTP or
HTTP File Transfer), you need to change the SSL Certificate Passphrase
for the new SSL files.
Setting
Enable HTTPS
(Secure Web)
Description
Check this box to enable SSL on the AP
NOTE:
You need to reboot the AP after enabling or
disabling SSL for the changes to take effect.
SSL Certificate
Passphrase
4-72
Specifies the SSL Passphrase to use if
Enable HTTPS has been checked. You must
change the SSL passphrase when
uploading a new certificate/private key pair,
which will have a corresponding passphrase.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Accessing the AP through the HTTPS interface
The user should use a SSL intelligent browser to access the AP through
the HTTPS interface. After configuring SSL, access the AP using https://
followed by the AP’s management IP address.
Telnet Configuration Settings
Setting
Description
Telnet Interface
Bitmask
Select the interface (Ethernet, Wireless,
All Interfaces) from which you can manage
the AP via telnet. This parameter can also
be used to Disable telnet management.
Telnet Port
The default port number for Telnet
applications is 23. However, you can use
this field if you want to change the Telnet
port for security reasons (but your Telnet
application also must support the new port
number you select).
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-73
Management
Setting
Description
Login Idle Timeout
(seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the system
will wait for a login attempt. The AP
terminates the session when it times out.
The range is 1 to 300 seconds; the default
is 30 seconds.
Session Idle
Timeout (seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the system
will wait during a session while there is no
activity. The AP will terminate the session
on timeout. The range is 1 to 36000
seconds; the default is 900 seconds.
2 of 2
4-74
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Serial Configuration Settings
The serial port interface on the AP is enabled at all times. See Setting IP
Address using Serial Port for information on how to access the CLI
interface via the serial port. You can configure and view following
parameters:
Setting
Description
Baud Rate
Select the serial port speed (bits per
second). Choose between 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600; the default
Baud Rate is 9600.
Flow Control
Select either None (default) or Xon/Xoff
(software controlled) data flow control.
NOTE:
To avoid potential problems when communicating
with the AP through the serial port, Avaya
recommends that you leave the Flow Control
setting at None (the default value).
Serial Data Bits
This is a read-only field and displays the
number of data bits used in serial
communication (8 data bits by default).
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-75
Management
Setting
Description
Serial Parity
This is a read-only field and displays the
number of parity bits used in serial
communication (no parity bits by default).
Serial Stop Bits
This is a read-only field that displays the
number of stop bits used in serial
communication (1 stop bit by default).
NOTE:
The serial port bit configuration is
commonly referred to as 8N1.
2 of 2
Automatic Configuration
The Automatic Configuration feature which allows an AP to be
automatically configured by downloading a specific configuration file from
a TFTP server during the boot up process.
Automatic Configuration is disabled by default. The configuration process
for Automatic Configuration varies depending on whether the AP is
configured for dynamic or static IP.
When an AP is configured for dynamic IP, the Configuration filename and
the TFTP server IP address are contained in the DHCP response when
the AP gets its IP address dynamically from the DHCP server. When
4-76
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
configured for static IP, these parameters are instead configured in the
AP interface.
After setting up automatic configuration you must reboot the AP. When
the AP reboots it receives the new configuration information and must
reboot one additional time. If Syslog is configured, a Syslog message will
appear indicating the success or failure of the Automatic Configuration.
Set up Automatic Configuration for Static IP
Perform the following procedure to enable and set up Automatic
Configuration when you have a static IP address for the TFTP server.
1. Click Configure > Management > AutoConfig. The Automatic
Configuration Screen appears.
2. Check Enable Auto Configuration.
3. Enter the Configuration Filename.
4. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the TFTP Server
Address field.
NOTE:
The default filename is config.
“169.254.128.133” for the AP.
The default TFTP IP address is
5. Click OK to save the changes.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-77
Management
6. Reboot the AP. When the AP reboots it receives the new
configuration information and must reboot one additional time. If a
Syslog server was configured, the following messages can be
observed on the Syslog server:
— AutoConfig for Static IP
— TFTP server address and configuration filename
— AutoConfig Successful
Figure 4-11.
4-78
Automatic Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Set up Automatic Configuration for Dynamic IP
Perform the following procedure to enable and set up Automatic
Configuration when you have a dynamic IP address for the TFTP server
via DHCP.
The Configuration filename and the TFTP server IP address are
contained in the DHCP response when the AP gets its IP address
dynamically from the DHCP server. A Syslog server address is also
contained in the DHCP response, allowing the AP to send Auto
Configuration success and failure messages to a Syslog server.
NOTE:
The configuration filename and TFTP server IP address are
configured only when the AP is configured for Static IP. If the AP is
configured for Dynamic IP these parameters are not used and
obtained from DHCP.
1. Click Configure > Management > AutoConfig. The Automatic
Configuration Screen appears.
2. Check Enable Auto Configuration.
When the AP is Configured with Dynamic IP, the DHCP server
should be configured with the TFTP Server IP address (Boot
Server Host Name, option 66) and Configuration file (Bootfile
Name, option 67) as follows:
3. Select DHCP Server > DHCP Option > Scope. The DHCP
Options: Scope Screen appears.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-79
Management
Figure 4-12.
DHCP Options: Setting the Boot Server Host Name
4. Add the Boot Server host name and Boot Filename parameters to
the Active Options list.
5. Set the value of the Boot Server host name parameter to the host
name or IP Address of the TFTP server. For example: 11.0.0.7.
4-80
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Management
Figure 4-13.
DHCP Options: Setting the Boot Server Host Name
6. Set the value of the Bootfile Name parameter to the Configuration
filename. For example: AP-Config
7. If using Syslog, set the Log server IP address (option 7, Log
Servers).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-81
Filtering
8. Reboot the AP. When the AP reboots it receives the new
configuration information and must reboot one additional time. If a
Syslog server was configured, the following messages can be
observed on the Syslog server:
— AutoConfig for Dynamic IP
— TFTP server address and configuration filename
— AutoConfig Successful
Filtering
The Access Point’s Packet Filtering features help control the amount of
traffic exchanged between the wired and wireless networks. There are
four sub-categories under the Filtering heading.
• Ethernet Protocol
• Static MAC
• Advanced
• TCP/UDP Port
Ethernet Protocol
The Ethernet Protocol Filter blocks or forwards packets based on the
Ethernet protocols they support.
4-82
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
Follow these steps to configure the Ethernet Protocol Filter:
1. Select the interface or interfaces that will implement the filter from
the Ethernet Protocol Filtering drop-down menu.
— Ethernet: Packets are examined at the Ethernet interface
— Wireless: Packets are examined at the Wireless interface
— All Interfaces: Packets are examined at both interfaces
— Disabled: The filter is not used
2. Select the Filter Operation Type.
— If set to Passthru, only the enabled Ethernet Protocols listed
in the Filter Table will pass through the bridge.
— If set to Block, the bridge will block enabled Ethernet
Protocols listed in the Filter Table.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-83
Filtering
3. Configure the Ethernet Protocol Filter Table. This table is
pre-populated with existing Ethernet Protocol Filters, however, you
may enter additional filters by specifying the appropriate
parameters.
— To add an entry, click Add, and then specify the Protocol
Number and a Protocol Name.
• Protocol Number: Enter the protocol number. See
http://www.iana.org/assignments/ethernet-numbers for a
list of protocol numbers.
• Protocol Name: Enter related information, typically the
protocol name.
— To edit or delete an entry, click Edit and change the
information, or select Enable, Disable, or Delete from the
Status drop-down menu.
— An entry’s status must be enabled in order for the protocol to
be subject to the filter.
4. Reboot the AP for any changes to the Ethernet Protocol Filter
Table to take effect.
Static MAC
The Static MAC Address filter optimizes the performance of a wireless
(and wired) network. When this feature is properly configured, the AP can
block traffic between wired devices and wireless devices based on MAC
address.
4-84
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
For example, you can set up a Static MAC filter to prevent wireless clients
from communicating with a specific server on the Ethernet network. You
can also use this filter to block unnecessary multicast packets from being
forwarded to the wireless network.
NOTE:
The Static MAC Filter is an advanced feature. You may find it easier
to control wireless traffic via other filtering options, such as Ethernet
Protocol Filtering.
Each static MAC entry contains the following fields:
• Wired MAC Address
• Wired Mask
• Wireless MAC Address
• Wireless Mask
• Comment: This field is optional.
Each MAC Address or Mask is comprised of 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9,
A-F) that correspond to a 48-bit identifier. (Each hexadecimal digit
represents 4 bits (0 or 1).)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-85
Filtering
Taken together, a MAC Address/Mask pair specifies an address or a
range of MAC addresses that the AP will look for when examining
packets. The AP uses Boolean logic to perform an “AND” operation
between the MAC Address and the Mask at the bit level. However, for
most users, you do not need to think in terms of bits. It should be
sufficient to create a filter using only the hexadecimal digits 0 and F in the
Mask (where 0 is any value and F is the value specified in the MAC
address). A Mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 corresponds to all MAC
addresses, and a Mask of FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF applies only to the
specified MAC Address.
Example
For example, if the MAC Address is 00:20:A6:12:54:C3 and the Mask is
FF:FF:FF:00:00:00, the AP will examine the source and destination
addresses of each packet looking for any MAC address starting with
00:20:A6. If the Mask is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, the AP will only look for the
specific MAC address (in this case, 00:20:A6:12:54:C3).
4-86
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
When creating a filter, you can configure the Wired parameters only, the
Wireless parameters only, or both sets of parameters. Which parameters
to configure depends upon the traffic that you want block:
To block all traffic...
Configure...
from a specific wired
MAC address from
being forwarded to
the wireless network
only the Wired MAC Address and Wired
Mask (leave the Wireless MAC Address
and Wireless Mask set to all zeros).
from a specific
wireless MAC
address from being
forwarded to the
wired network
only the Wireless MAC address and
Wireless Mask (leave the Wired MAC
Address and Wired Mask set to all zeros).
between a specific
wired MAC address
and a specific
wireless MAC
address
all four parameters.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-87
Filtering
Creating an Entry
To create an entry, click Add and enter the appropriate MAC addresses
and Masks to setup a filter. The entry is enabled automatically when
saved. To edit an entry, click Edit. To disable or remove an entry, click
Edit and change the Status field from Enable to Disable or Delete.
Figure 4-14.
4-88
Static MAC Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
Static MAC Filter Examples
Consider a network that contains a wired server and three wireless
clients. The MAC address for each unit is as follows:
• Wired Server: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
• wireless Client 1: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4
• Wireless Client 2: 00:02:2D:51:32:12
• Wireless Client 3: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38
Prevent Two Specific Devices from Communicating
Configure the following settings to prevent the Wired Server and Wireless
Client 1 from communicating:
• Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
• Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
• Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4
• Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Result: Traffic between the Wired Server and Wireless Client 1 is
blocked. Wireless Clients 2 and 3 can still communicate with the Wired
Server.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-89
Filtering
Prevent Multiple Wireless Devices From Communicating With a
Single Wired Device
Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Clients 1 and 2 from
communicating with the Wired Server.
• Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
• Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
• Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4
• Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:00:00:00
Result: When a logical “AND” is performed on the Wireless MAC
Address and Wireless Mask, the result corresponds to any MAC address
beginning with the 00:20:2D prefix. Since Wireless Client 1 and Wireless
Client 2 share the same prefix (00:02:2D), traffic between the Wired
Server and Wireless Clients 1 and 2 is blocked. Wireless Client 3 can still
communicate with the Wired Server since it has a different prefix
(00:20:A6).
4-90
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
Prevent All Wireless Devices From Communicating With a Single
Wired Device
Configure the following settings to prevent all three Wireless Clients from
communicating with Wired Server 1.
• Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
• Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
• Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
• Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Result: The Access Point blocks all traffic between Wired Server 1 and
all wireless clients.
Prevent A Wireless Device From Communicating With the Wired
Network
Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Client 3 from
communicating with any device on the Ethernet.
• Wired MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
• Wired Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00
• Wireless MAC Address: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38
• Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Result: The Access Point blocks all traffic between Wireless Client 3 and
the Ethernet network.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-91
Filtering
Prevent Messages Destined for a Specific Multicast Group from
Being Forwarded to the Wireless LAN
If there are devices on your Ethernet network that use multicast packets
to communicate and these packets are not required by your wireless
clients, you can set up a Static MAC filter to preserve wireless bandwidth.
For example, if routers on your network use a specific multicast address
(such as 01:00:5E:00:32:4B) to exchange information, you can set up a
filter to prevent these multicast packets from being forwarded to the
wireless network:
• Wired MAC Address: 01:00:5E:00:32:4B
• Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
• Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
• Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Result: The Access Point does not forward any packets that have a
destination address of 01:00:5E:00:32:4B to the wireless network.
4-92
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
Advanced
You can configure the following advanced filtering options:
• Enable Proxy ARP: Place a check mark in the box provided to allow
the Access Point to respond to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
requests for wireless clients. When enabled, the AP answers ARP
requests for wireless stations without actually forwarding them to
the wireless network. If disabled, the Access Point will bridge ARP
requests for wireless clients to the wireless LAN.
• Enable IP/ARP Filtering: Place a check mark in the box provided
to allow IP/ARP filtering based on the IP/ARP Filtering Address and
IP Mask. Leave the box unchecked to prevent filtering. If enabled,
you should also configure the IP/ARP Filtering Address and IP/ARP
IP Mask.
— IP/ARP Filtering Address: Enter the Network filtering IP
Address.
— IP/ARP IP Mask: Enter the Network Mask IP Address.
The following protocols are listed in the Advanced Filter Table:
• Deny IPX RIP
• Deny IPX SAP
• Deny IPX LSP
• Deny IP Broadcasts
• Deny IP Multicasts
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-93
Filtering
The AP can filter these protocols in the wireless-to-Ethernet direction, the
Ethernet-to-wireless direction, or in both directions. Click Edit and use the
Status field to Enable or Disable the filter.
TCP/UDP Port
Port-based filtering enables you to control wireless user access to
network services by selectively blocking TCP/UDP protocols through the
AP. A user specifies a Protocol Name, Port Number, Port Type (TCP,
UDP, or TCP/UDP), and filtering interfaces (Wireless only, Ethernet only,
all interfaces, or no interfaces) in order to block access to services, such
as Telnet and FTP, and traffic, such as NETBIOS and HTTP.
For example, an AP with the following configuration would discard frames
received on its Ethernet interface with a UDP destination port number of
137, effectively blocking NETBIOS Name Service packets.
Protocol
Type
(TCP/UDP)
UDP
4-94
Destination
Port
Number
137
Protocol
Name
NETBIOS
Name
Service
Interface
Ethernet
Status
(Enable/Disable)
Enable
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering
Adding TCP/UDP Port Filters
1. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable TCP/UDP Port
Filtering.
2. Click Add under the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table heading.
3. In the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table, enter the Protocol Names to
filter.
4. Set the destination Port Number (a value between 1 and 65535) to
filter. See the IANA Web site at
http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers for a list of
assigned port numbers and their descriptions.
5. Set the Port Type for the protocol: TCP, UDP, or both (TCP/UDP).
6. Set the Interface to filter:
— Wireless
— Ethernet
— All interfaces
— No interfaces
7. Click OK.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-95
Alarms
Editing TCP/UDP Port Filters
1. Click Edit under the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table heading.
2. Make any changes to the Protocol Name or Port Number for a
specific entry, if necessary.
3. In the row that defines the port, set the Status to Enable, Disable,
or Delete, as appropriate.
4. Select OK.
Alarms
This category has three sub-categories.
• Groups
• Alarm Host Table
• Syslog
4-96
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
Groups
There are seven alarm groups that can be enabled or disabled via the
Web interface. Place a check mark in the box provided to enable a
specific group. Remove the check mark from the box to disable the
alarms. Alarm Severity Levels vary.
• Configuration Alarm
Trap Name
oriTrapDNSIPNotConfigured
Description
This traps is generated when the
DNS IP Address has not been
configured.
Severity Level: Major
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-97
Alarms
• Security Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapAuthenticationFailure
Description
This trap is generated when a client
authentication failure occurs. The
authentication failures can range
from:
- MAC Access Control Table
- RADIUS MAC Authentication
- 802.1x Authentication specifying
the EAP-Type
Severity Level: Major
oriTrapUnauthorizedManager
Detected
This trap is generated when an
unauthorized manager has
attempted to view and/or modify
parameters.
Severity Level: Major
4-98
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
• Wireless Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapWLCNotPresent
Description
When you start the AP, this trap is
generated when a wireless
interface/card is not present in the
AP.
Severity Level: Informational
oriTrapWLCFailure
This trap is generated when a
general failure occurs with the
wireless interface/card.
Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapWLCRemoval
This trap is generated when the
wireless interface/card has been
removed from the device.
Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapWLCIncompatibleFirmwa
re
This trap is generated when the
firmware of the wireless
interface/card is incompatible with
the AP.
Severity Level: Critical
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-99
Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapWLCVoltageDiscrepancy
Description
The dual-radio AP supports 3.3 V
and 5 V wireless cards. This trap is
generated when a wireless
interface/card using a different
voltage is inserted in the AP.
Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapWLCIncompatibleVendor
This trap is generated when an
incompatible wireless vendor card is
inserted or present in the AP.
Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapWLCFirmwareDownload
Failure
This trap is generated when a failure
occurs during the firmware download
process of the wireless
interface/card.
Severity Level: Critical
2 of 2
4-100
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
• Operational Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapWatchDogTimerExpired
Description
This trap is generated when the
software watch dog timer expires.
This indicates that a problem has
occurred with one or more software
modules and the AP will reboot
automatically.
Trap Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapRADIUSServerNot
Responding
This trap is generated when no
response is received from the
RADIUS server(s) for authentication
requests sent from the RADIUS
client in the AP.
Trap Severity Level: Major
oriTrapModuleNotInitialized
This trap is generated when a certain
software or hardware module is not
initialized or fails to initialize.
Trap Severity Level: Major
oriTrapDeviceRebooting
This trap is generated when the AP is
rebooting.
Trap Severity Level: Informational
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-101
Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapTaskSuspended
Description
This trap is generated when a
software task in the AP is
suspended.
Trap Severity Level: Critical
oriTrapBootPFailed
In bootloader mode, this trap is
generated when the AP does not
receive a response from the BootP
server. The result is that the Access
Point reverts to its static IP
configuration and you will need to set
reset configuration options.
Trap Severity Level: Major
oriTrapDHCPFailed
In operational mode, this trap is
generated when the AP does not
receive a response from the DHCP
server. The result is that the Access
Point reverts to its static IP
configuration and you will need to set
reset configuration options.
Trap Severity Level: Major
2 of 2
4-102
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
• FLASH Memory Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapFlashMemoryEmpty
Description
This trap is generated when an error
occurs while downloading a file to the
AP and no data is present in the flash
memory.
Severity Level: Informational
oriTrapFlashMemoryCorrupted
This trap is generated when an error
occurs while downloading a file to the
AP and the data in the flash memory
is invalid or corrupted.
Severity Level: Critical
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-103
Alarms
• TFTP Alarms
Trap Name
Description
This trap is generated when a
failure occurs during a TFTP
upload or download operation.
oriTrapTFTPFailedOperation
Severity Level: Major
This trap is generated when a
TFTP upload or download
operation is started.
oriTrapTFTPOperationInitiated
Severity Level: Informational
oriTrapTFTPOperationCompleted
This trap is generated when a
TFTP operation is complete
(upload or download).
Severity Level: Informational
• Image Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapZeroSizeImage
Description
This trap is generated when a zero
size image is loaded on the AP.
Trap Severity Level: Major
1 of 2
4-104
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
Trap Name
oriTrapInvalidImage
Description
This trap is generated when an
invalid image is loaded in the Access
Point.
Trap Severity Level: Major
oriTrapImageTooLarge
This trap is generated when the
image loaded in the AP exceeds the
size limitation of the flash memory.
Trap Severity Level: Major
oriTrapIncompatibleImage
This trap is generated when an
incompatible image is loaded in the
AP.
Trap Severity Level: Major
2 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-105
Alarms
In addition, the AP supports these standard traps, which are always
enabled:
• RFC 1215-Trap
Trap
Name
coldStart
Description
The AP has been turned on or rebooted.
Trap Severity Level: Informational
linkUp
The AP's Ethernet interface link is up (working).
Trap Severity Level: Informational
linkDown
The AP's Ethernet interface link is down (not
working).
Trap Severity Level: Informational
4-106
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
• Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) Alarms
Trap Name
newRoot
Description
This trap indicates that the AP has become
the new root in the Spanning Tree network.
Trap Severity Level: Informational
topologyChange
This trap is sent by the AP when any of its
configured ports transitions from the Learning
state to the Forwarding state, or from the
Forwarding state to the Blocking state.
This trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent
for the same transition.
Trap Severity Level: Informational
All these alarm groups correspond to System Alarms that are displayed in
the System Status screen, including the traps that are sent by the AP to
the SNMP managers specified in the Alarm Host Table.
Severity Levels
There are three severity levels for system alarms:
• Critical
• Major
• Informational
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-107
Alarms
Critical alarms will often result in severe disruption in network activity or
an automatic reboot of the AP
Major alarms are usually activated due to a breach in the security of the
system. Clients cannot be authenticated or an attempt at unauthorized
access into the AP has been detected.
Informational alarms are there to provide the network administrator with
some general information about the activities the AP is performing.
Alarm Host Table
Add an Entry or Enable the AP
To add an entry and enable the AP to send SNMP trap messages to a
Trap Host, click Add, and then specify the IP Address and Password.
NOTE:
Up to 10 entries are possible in the Alarm Host table.
• IP Address: Enter the Trap Host IP Address.
• Password: Enter the password in the Password field and the
Confirm field.
• Comment: Enter an optional comment, such as the alarm (trap)
host station name.
4-108
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
Edit or Delete an Entry
To edit or delete an entry, click Edit. Edit the information, or select
Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status drop-down menu.
Syslog
The Syslog messaging system enables the AP to transmit event
messages to a central server for monitoring and troubleshooting. The AP
can send messages to one Syslog server (it cannot send messages to
more than one Syslog server).The access point logs “Session Start
(Log-in)” and “Session Stop (Log-out)” events for each wireless client as
an alternative to RADIUS accounting.
See RFC 3164 at http://www.rfc-editor.org for more information on the
Syslog standard.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-109
Alarms
Figure 4-15.
4-110
Syslog Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Alarms
Setting Syslog Event Notifications
Syslog Events are logged according to the level of detail specified by the
administrator. Logging only urgent system messages will create a far
smaller, more easily read log then a log of every event the system
encounters. Determine which events to log by selecting a priority defined
by the following scale:
Event
Priority
Description
LOG_EMERG
0
system is unusable
LOG_ALERT
1
action must be taken immediately
LOG_CRIT
2
critical conditions
LOG_ERR
3
error conditions
LOG_WARNING
4
warning conditions
LOG_NOTICE
5
normal but significant condition
LOG_INFO
6
informational
LOG_DEBUG
7
debug-level messages
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-111
Alarms
Configuring Syslog Event Notifications
You can configure the following Syslog settings from the HTTP interface:
• Enable Syslog: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable
system logging.
• Syslog Port Number: This field is read-only and displays the port
number (514) assigned for system logging.
• Syslog Lowest Priority Logged: The AP will send event messages
to the Syslog server that correspond to the selected priority and
above. For example, if set to 6, the AP will transmit event messages
labeled priority 0 to 6 to the Syslog server(s). This parameter
supports a range between 1 and 7; 6 is the default.
• Syslog Host Table: This table specifies the IP addresses of a
network servers that the AP will send Syslog messages to. Click
Add to create a new entry. Click Edit to change an existing entry.
Each entry contains the following field:
— IP Address: Enter the IP Address for the management host.
— Comment: Enter an optional comment such as the host
name.
— Status: The entry is enabled automatically when saved (so
the Status field is only visible when editing an entry). You can
also disable or delete entries by changing this field’s value.
4-112
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Bridge
Bridge
The AP is a bridge between your wired and wireless networking devices.
As a bridge, the functions performed by the AP include:
• MAC address learning
• Forward and filtering decision making
• Spanning Tree protocol used for loop avoidance
Once the AP is connected to your network, it learns which devices are
connected to it and records their MAC addresses in the Learn Table. The
table can hold up to 10,000 entries. To view the Learn Table, click on the
Monitor button in the web interface and select the Learn Table tab.
The Bridge tab has four sub-categories.
• Spanning Tree
• Storm Threshold
• Intra BSS
• Packet Forwarding
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-113
Bridge
Spanning Tree
A Spanning Tree is used to avoid redundant communication loops in
networks with multiple bridging devices. Bridges do not have any inherent
mechanism to avoid loops, because having redundant systems is a
necessity in certain networks. However, redundant systems can cause
Broadcast Storms, multiple frame copies, and MAC address table
instability problems.
Complex network structures can create multiple loops within a network.
The Spanning Tree configuration blocks certain ports on AP devices to
control the path of communication within the network, avoiding loops and
following a spanning tree structure.
For more information on Spanning Tree protocol, please see Section 8.0
of the IEEE 802.1d standard. The Spanning Tree configuration options
are advanced settings. Avaya recommends that you leave these
parameters at their default values unless you are familiar with the
Spanning Tree protocol.
Storm Threshold
Storm Threshold is an advanced Bridge setup option that you can use to
protect the network against data overload by:
• Specifying a maximum number of frames per second as received
from a single network device (identified by its MAC address).
• Specifying an absolute maximum number of messages per port.
4-114
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Bridge
The Storm Threshold parameters allow you to specify a set of thresholds
for each port of the AP, identifying separate values for the number of
broadcast messages/second and Multicast messages/second.
When the number of frames for a port or identified station exceeds the
maximum value per second, the AP will ignore all subsequent messages
issued by the particular network device, or ignore all messages of that
type.
• Address Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of
packets per second.
• Ethernet Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of
packets per second.
• Wireless Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of
packets per second.
Intra BSS
The wireless clients (or subscribers) that associate with a certain AP form
the Basic Service Set (BSS) of a network infrastructure. By default,
wireless subscribers in the same BSS can communicate with each other.
However, some administrators (such as wireless public spaces) may wish
to block traffic between wireless subscribers that are associated with the
same AP to prevent unauthorized communication and to conserve
bandwidth. This feature enables you to prevent wireless subscribers
within a BSS from exchanging traffic.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-115
Bridge
Although this feature is generally enabled in public access environments,
Enterprise LAN administrators use it to conserve wireless bandwidth by
limiting communication between wireless clients. For example, this
feature prevents peer-to-peer file sharing or gaming over the wireless
network.
• To block Intra BSS traffic, set Intra BSS Traffic Operation to Block.
• To allow Intra BSS traffic, set Intra BSS Traffic Operation to
Passthru.
Packet Forwarding
The Packet Forwarding feature enables you to redirect traffic generated
by wireless clients that are all associated to the same AP to a single MAC
address. This filters wireless traffic without burdening the AP and
provides additional security by limiting potential destinations or by routing
the traffic directly to a firewall. You can redirect to a specific port (Ethernet
or WDS) or allow the bridge’s learning process (and the forwarding table
entry for the selected MAC address) to determine the optimal port.
NOTE:
The gateway to which traffic will be redirected should be node on
the Ethernet network. It should not be a wireless client.
4-116
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Bridge
Configuring Interfaces for Packet Forwarding
Configure your AP to forward packets by specifying interface port(s) to
which packets are redirected and a destination MAC address.
1. Within the Packet Forwarding Configuration screen, check the
box labeled Enable Packet Forwarding.
2. Specify a destination Packet Forwarding MAC Address. The AP
will redirect all unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets received
from wireless clients to the address you specify.
3. Select a Packet Forwarding Interface Port from the drop-down
menu. You can redirect traffic to:
— Ethernet
— A WDS connection (see Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
for details)
— Any (traffic is redirected to a port based on the bridge learning
process)
4. Click OK to save your changes.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-117
Security
Security
The AP provides several security features to protect your network from
unauthorized access.
• Authentication and Encryption Modes
• MAC Access
• Rogue Access Point Detection (RAD)
Authentication and Encryption Modes
The AP supports the following Security features:
Type
Description
WEP Encryption
The original encryption technique specified
by the IEEE 802.11 standard.
802.1x
Authentication
An IEEE standard for client authentication.
Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA)
A new standard that provides improved
encryption security over WEP.
4-118
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
WEP Encryption
The IEEE 802.11 standards specify an optional encryption feature, known
as Wired Equivalent Privacy or WEP, that is designed to provide a
wireless LAN with a security level equal to what is found on a wired
Ethernet network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on an 802.11 network using an Encryption Key (also known
as a WEP Key).
When Encryption is enabled, two 802.11 devices must have the same
Encryption Keys and both devices must be configured to use Encryption
in order to communicate. If one device is configured to use Encryption but
a second device is not, then the two devices will not communicate, even if
both devices have the same Encryption Keys.
• An 802.11b AP supports 64-bit and 128-bit encryption:
— For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart).
— For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII characters.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-119
Security
• An 802.11a or 802.11b/g AP supports 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit
encryption:
— For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart).
— For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII characters.
— For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal
characters or 16 ASCII characters.
NOTE:
64-bit encryption is sometimes referred to as 40-bit encryption;
128-bit encryption is sometimes referred to as 104-bit encryption.
802.1x Authentication
IEEE 802.1x is a standard that provides a means to authenticate and
authorize network devices attached to a LAN port. A port in the context of
IEEE 802.1x is a point of attachment to the LAN, either a physical
Ethernet connection or a wireless link to an Access Point. 802.1x requires
a RADIUS server and uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
as a standards-based authentication framework, and supports automatic
key distribution for enhanced security. The EAP-based authentication
framework can easily be upgraded to keep pace with future EAP types.
4-120
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
Popular EAP types include:
Type
Description
EAP-Message
Digest 5 (MD5)
Username/Password-based authentication;
does not support automatic key distribution
EAP-Transport
Layer Security (TLS)
Certificate-based authentication (a
certificate is required on the server and
each client); supports automatic key
distribution
EAP-Tunneled
Transport Layer
Security (TTLS)
Certificate-based authentication (a
certificate is required on the server; a
client’s username/password is tunneled to
the server over a secure connection);
supports automatic key distribution
PEAP - Protected
EAP with MS-CHAP
v2
Secure username/password-based
authentication; supports automatic key
distribution
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-121
Security
Different servers support different EAP types and each EAP type provides
different features. Refer to the documentation that came with your
RADIUS server to determine which EAP types it supports.
NOTE:
The AP supports the following EAP types when Authentication
Mode is set to 802.1x or WPA: EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-TTLS.
When Authentication Mode is set to Mixed, the AP supports the
following EAP types: EAP-TLS, PEAP, EAP-TLLS, and EAP-MD5
(MD5 does not support automatic key distribution; therefore, if you
choose this method you need to manually configure each client with
the network's encryption key).
Authentication Process
There are three main components in the authentication process. The
standard refers to them as:
1. supplicant (client PC)
2. authenticator (Access Point)
3. authentication server (RADIUS server)
When using Authentication Mode is set to 802.1x, WPA, or Mixed mode
(802.1x and WEP), you need to configure your RADIUS server for
authentication purposes.
4-122
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
Prior to successful authentication, an unauthenticated client PC cannot
send any data traffic through the AP device to other systems on the LAN.
The AP inhibits all data traffic from a particular client PC until the client PC
is authenticated. Regardless of its authentication status, a client PC can
always exchange 802.1x messages in the clear with the AP (the client
begins encrypting data after it has been authenticated).
Figure 4-16.
RADIUS Authentication Illustrated
The AP acts as a pass-through device to facilitate communications
between the client PC and the RADIUS server. The AP (2) and the client
(1) exchange 802.1x messages using an EAPOL (EAP Over LAN)
protocol (A). Messages sent from the client station are encapsulated by
the AP and transmitted to the RADIUS (3) server using EAP extensions
(B).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-123
Security
Upon receiving a reply EAP packet from the RADIUS, the message is
typically forwarded to the client, after translating it back to the EAPOL
format. Negotiations take place between the client and the RADIUS
server. After the client has been successfully authenticated, the client
receives an Encryption Key from the AP (if the EAP type supports
automatic key distribution). The client uses this key to encrypt data after it
has been authenticated.
For 802.11a and 802.11b/g clients that communicate with an AP, each
client receives its own unique encryption key; this is known as Per User
Per Session Encryption Keys.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security standard designed by the
Wi-Fi Alliance in conjunction with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE). WPA is a sub-set of the forthcoming IEEE 802.11i
security standard, currently in draft form. (IEEE 802.11i is also referred to
as “WPA2” and will be available in 2004.)
NOTE:
For Single-radio APs: WPA is available for the AP-6 (or APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g upgrade kit). WPA is NOT
available for the AP-5 or AP-4. Note that while you can select WPA
on AP-5 units, WPA is not supported for the AP-5 unless you have
installed an 802.11a/b/g upgrade kit.
4-124
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
WPA is a replacement for Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), the
encryption technique specified by the original 802.11 standard. WEP has
several vulnerabilities that have been widely publicized. WPA addresses
these weaknesses and provides a stronger security system to protect
wireless networks.
WPA provides the following new security measures not available with
WEP:
• Improved packet encryption using the Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol (TKIP) and the Michael Message Integrity Check (MIC).
• Per-user, per-session dynamic encryption keys:
— Each client uses a different key to encrypt and decrypt unicast
packets exchanged with the AP
— A client's key is different for every session; it changes each
time the client associates with an AP
— The AP uses a single global key to encrypt broadcast packets
that are sent to all clients simultaneously
— Encryption keys change periodically based on the Re-keying
Interval parameter
— WPA uses 128-bit encryption keys
• Dynamic Key distribution
— The AP generates and maintains the keys for its clients
— The AP securely delivers the appropriate keys to its clients
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-125
Security
• Client/server mutual authentication
— 802.1x
— Pre-shared key (for networks that do not have an 802.1x
solution implemented)
NOTE:
For more information on WPA, see the Wi-Fi Alliance Web site at
http://www.wi-fi.org.
The AP supports two WPA authentication modes:
• WPA: The AP uses 802.1x to authenticate clients. You should only
use an EAP that supports mutual authentication and session key
generation, such as EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, and PEAP. See 802.1x
Authentication for details.
• WPA-PSK (Pre-Shared Key): For networks that do not have 802.1x
implemented, you can configure the AP to authenticate clients
based on a Pre-Shared Key. This is a shared secret that is manually
configured on the AP and each of its clients. The Pre-Shared Key
must be 256 bits long, which is 64 hexadecimal digits. The AP also
supports a PSK Pass Phrase option to facilitate the creation of the
Pre-Shared Key (so a user can enter an easy-to-remember phrase
rather than a string of characters).
4-126
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
Configuring Security Settings
You can configure each SSID/VLAN to operate in one of the following
Security modes:
Security Mode
Description
No Security
This is the default setting for an AP.
Enable WEP
Encryption
The AP and clients use the same static
WEP keys to encrypt data.
Enable 802.1x
Security
The AP uses the 802.1x standard to
communicate with a RADIUS server and
authenticate clients. The AP generates and
distributes dynamic, per user WEP Keys to
each client following successful
authentication.
Enable Mixed Mode
(802.1x and WEP
Encryption)
The AP uses 802.1x Mode for clients that
support 802.1x (and have an 802.1x
supplicant application installed). The AP
uses static WEP Encryption for clients that
do not use 802.1x.
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-127
Security
Security Mode
Description
Enable WPA Mode
The AP uses 802.1x to communicate with a
RADIUS server and authenticate clients.
The AP generates and distributes dynamic,
per user encryption keys (based on the
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)) to
each client following successful
authentication. WPA mode provides
message integrity checking to guard
against replay type attacks. This mode is
not available for all radio types.
Enable WPA-PSK
Mode
The AP uses a Pre-shared Key (manually
configured on both the AP and the clients)
to authenticate clients. The AP generates
and distributes dynamic, per user
encryption keys (based on TKIP) to each
client following successful authentication.
This mode is for customers who want to use
WPA but do not have a RADIUS server
installed on their network. This mode is not
available for all radio types.
2 of 2
You configure an SSID/VLAN to use a particular Security mode by setting
the Security Mode parameter in the SSID, VLAN, and Security table (see
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries). The following
table summarizes the Security Mode options available in the HTTP
4-128
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Security
Interface's Configure > SSID/VLAN/Security Mode/Wireless A/B
screen and describes how each of these options correspond to the six
Security Modes listed above:
Authentication Mode Authentication
Setting
Method Employed
None
None
802.1x
Mixed
WPA
WPA-PSK
Encryption Method
Employed
None or manually
configured Static WEP
settings
802.1x
Dynamic WEP Keying
802.1x or None
Dynamic WEP Keying
(depends on a client's or Static WEP
configuration)
(depends on client's
configuration)
802.1x
Dynamic TKIP Keying
Manually configured
Dynamic TKIP Keying
Pre-shared Key
NOTE:
Before enabling the 802.1x, Mixed, or WPA mode, the 802.1x server
should be configured. Set the encryption key in Mixed mode after
the authentication is set to Mixed mode.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-129
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
Authentication Protocol Hierarchy
There is a hierarchy of authentication protocols defined for the AP.
The hierarchy is as follows, from Highest to lowest:
• 802.1x authentication
• MAC Access Control via RADIUS Authentication
• MAC Access Control through individual APs' MAC Access Control
Lists
If both 802.1x and MAC authentication are enabled, the 802.1x results will
take effect. This is required in order to propagate the WEP keys to the
clients in such cases. Once you disable 802.1x on the AP, you will see the
effects of MAC authentication.
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
The AP allows you to segment wireless networks into multiple
sub-networks based on Network Name (SSID) and VLAN membership,
and to apply security modes per SSID.
NOTE:
The ability to configure up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs and configure a
security mode per SSID is available only for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed.
4-130
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
A Network Name (SSID) identifies a wireless network. Clients associate
with Access Points that share its SSID. During installation, the Setup
Wizard prompts you to configure one Network Name for each wireless
interface.
After initial setup, the AP can be configured to support up to 16 SSIDs per
wireless interface to segment wireless networks based on VLAN
membership.
Refer to Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries for
configuration details.
VLAN Overview
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) are logical groupings of network
hosts. Defined by software settings, other VLAN members or resources
appear (to clients) to be on the same physical segment, no matter where
they are attached on the logical LAN or WAN segment. They simplify
traffic flow between clients and their frequently-used or restricted
resources.
VLANs now extend as far as the reach of the access point signal. Clients
can be segmented into wireless sub-networks via SSID and VLAN
assignment. A Client can access the network by connecting to an AP
configured to support its assigned SSID/VLAN.
AP devices are fully VLAN-ready; however, by default VLAN support is
disabled. Before enabling VLAN support, certain network settings should
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-131
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
be configured, and network resources such as a VLAN-aware switch, a
RADIUS server, and possibly a DHCP server should be available.
Once enabled, VLANs are used to conveniently, efficiently, and easily
manage your network in the following ways:
• Manage adds, moves, and changes from a single point of contact
• Define and monitor groups
• Reduce broadcast and multicast traffic to unnecessary destinations
— Improve network performance and reduce latency
• Increase security
— Secure network restricts members to resources on their own
VLAN
— Clients roam without compromising security
VLAN tagged data is collected and distributed through an AP's wireless
interface(s) based on Network Name (SSID). An Ethernet port on the
access point connects a wireless cell or network to a wired backbone.
The access points communicate across a VLAN-capable switch that
analyzes VLAN-tagged packet headers and directs traffic to the
appropriate ports. On the wired network, a RADIUS server authenticates
traffic and a DHCP server manages IP addresses for the VLAN(s).
Resources like servers and printers may be present, and a hub may
include multiple APs, extending the network over a larger area.
In this figure, the numbered items correspond to the following
components:
4-132
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
1. VLAN-enabled access point
2. VLAN-aware switch (IEEE 802.1Q uplink)
3. AP management via wired host (SNMP, Web interface or CLI)
4. DHCP Server
5. RADIUS Server
6. VLAN 1
7. VLAN 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-133
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
Figure 4-17.
4-134
Components of a typical VLAN
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
VLAN Workgroups and Traffic Management
Access Points that are not VLAN-capable typically transmit broadcast and
multicast traffic to all wireless Network Interface Cards (NICs). This
process wastes wireless bandwidth and degrades throughput
performance. In comparison, VLAN-capable AP is designed to efficiently
manage delivery of broadcast, multicast, and unicast traffic to wireless
clients.
The AP assigns clients to a VLAN based on a Network Name (SSID). The
AP can support up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs per radio (based on model
type).
NOTE:
The ability to configure up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs and configure a
security mode per SSID is available only for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed.
The AP matches packets transmitted or received to a network name with
the associated VLAN. Traffic received by a VLAN is only sent on the
wireless interface associated with that same VLAN. This eliminates
unnecessary traffic on the wireless LAN, conserving bandwidth and
maximizing throughput.
Traffic Management
In addition to enhancing wireless traffic management, the VLAN-capable
AP supports easy assignment of wireless users to workgroups. In a
typical scenario, each user VLAN represents a workgroup; for example,
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-135
SSID, VLAN, and Security Modes
one VLAN could be used for an EMPLOYEE workgroup and the other, for
a GUEST workgroup.
In this scenario, the AP would assign every packet it accepted to a VLAN.
Each packet would then be identified as EMPLOYEE or GUEST,
depending on which wireless NIC received it. The AP would insert VLAN
headers or “tags” with identifiers into the packets transmitted on the wired
backbone to a network switch.
Finally, the switch would be configured to route packets from the
EMPLOYEE workgroup to the appropriate corporate resources such as
printers and servers. Packets from the GUEST workgroup could be
restricted to a gateway that allowed access to only the Internet. A
member of the GUEST workgroup could send and receive e-mail and
access the Internet, but would be prevented from accessing servers or
hosts on the local corporate network.
Typical User VLAN Configurations
VLANs segment network traffic into workgroups, which enable you to limit
broadcast and multicast traffic. Workgroups enable clients from different
VLANs to access different resources using the same network
infrastructure. Clients using the same physical network are limited to
those resources available to their workgroup.
The AP can segment users into a maximum of 16 different workgroups
(32 if using two cards in a Dual-radio AP) based on an SSID/VLAN pair
(also referred as a VLAN Workgroup or a Sub-network).
4-136
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
NOTE:
The ability to configure up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs and configure a
security mode per SSID is available only for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed.
The four primary scenarios for using VLAN workgroups are as follows:
1. VLAN disabled: Your network does not use VLANs, but you can
configure the AP to use multiple SSIDs.
2. VLAN enabled, all VLAN Workgroups use the same VLAN ID Tag
3. VLAN enabled, each VLAN workgroup uses a different VLAN ID
Tag
4. VLAN enabled, a mixture of Tagged and Untagged workgroups
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode
Entries
Each SSID/VLAN can have its own security mode, so that customers can
have multiple types of clients (non-WEP, WEP, 802.1x, WPA) on the
same system, but separated by VLAN.
NOTE:
You must reboot the AP before any changes to these parameters
take effect.
1. Click Configure > SSID/VLAN/Security > Mgmt VLAN.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-137
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
2. Place a check mark in the Enable VLAN Protocol box to enable
VLAN support. If VLAN is disabled, all table entries on the
SSID/VLAN/Security page will be disabled.
3. Click the tab for Wireless A or Wireless B (if applicable).
4. Place a check in the Enable Security Per SSID check box.
4-138
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Figure 4-18.
SSID, VLAN, and Security Table - Wireless A
NOTE:
The ability to configure up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs and configure a
security mode per SSID is available only for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-139
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
5. Add one or more new SSID/VLAN/security mode entries. Each
wireless interface supports up to 16 entries. Follow these steps:
a. Click Add to create a new SSID/VLAN/security mode entry.
Figure 4-19.
Entries
4-140
SSID, VLAN, and Security Table - Wireless A - Add
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
b. Enter a Network Name (SSID), between 2 and 31 characters,
in the field provided. This parameter is mandatory.
c. Enter a VLAN ID in the field provided. This parameter is
mandatory.
— You must specify a unique VLAN ID for each SSID on the
interface. As defined by the 802.1Q standard, a VLAN ID
is a number between 1 and 4094. A value of -1 means
that an entry is untagged.
— You can set the VLAN ID to -1 or untagged if you do not
want clients that are using a specific SSID to be
members of a VLAN workgroup. Only one “untagged”
VLAN ID is allowed per interface.
— The VLAN ID must match an ID used by your network;
contact your network administrator if you need
assistance defining the VLAN IDs.
d. Select the security mode for the SSID/VLAN entry and
configure the security mode parameters according to one of
the following procedures:
— Enable WEP Encryption
— Enable 802.1x Security
— Enable Mixed Mode (802.1x and WEP Encryption)
— Enable WPA Mode
— Enable WPA-PSK Mode
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-141
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
NOTE:
If you have two or more SSIDs per interface with a security mode of
None, be aware that security being applied in the VLAN is not being
applied in the wireless network.
NOTE:
Some parameters on other pages must be configured for each
security mode to function. RADIUS server(s) must be configured to
support authentication of WPA, 802.1x or WEP clients. Encryption
keys must be configured for WEP clients if mixed mode is selected.
Enable WEP Encryption
Follow these steps to set up WEP encryption on an SSID/VLAN pair:
1. Set Security Mode to WEP (if necessary).
2. Enter Encryption Key 0 only; the transmit key (the key used to
encrypt outgoing data) will be automatically set to zero. Keep in
mind the following:
— For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart).
— For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII characters.
— For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal
characters or 16 ASCII characters.
4-142
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Enable 802.1x Security
Follow these steps to enable 802.1x on an SSID/VLAN pair:
1. Set Security Mode to 802.1x.
2. Select an Encryption Key Length.
— An 802.11b AP supports 64-bit and 128-bit encryption.
— An 802.11a or 802.11b/g AP supports 64-bit and 128-bit
encryption.
3. Enter a Re-keying Interval.
The Re-keying Interval determines how often a client’s encryption
key is changed and can be set to any value between 60 - 65535
seconds. Rekeying frustrates hacking attempts without taxing
system resources. Setting a fairly frequent rekey value (900
seconds=15 minutes) effectively protects against intrusion without
disrupting network activities.
Enable Mixed Mode (802.1x and WEP Encryption)
Follow these steps to use both 802.1x and WEP Encryption
simultaneously (clients that do not support 802.1x use WEP Encryption
for security purposes) on an SSID/VLAN pair:
1. Set Security Mode to Mixed.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-143
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
2. Enter a Re-keying Interval.
The Re-keying Interval determines how often a client’s encryption
key is changed and can be set to any value between 60 - 65535
seconds. Rekeying frustrates hacking attempts without taxing
system resources. Setting a fairly frequent rekey value (900
seconds=15 minutes) effectively protects against intrusion without
disrupting network activities.
3. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Encryption (WEP).
4. Configure Encryption Key 1 only (i.e., do not configure Keys 2
through 4). Keep in mind the following:
— For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal
characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII
Character Chart).
— For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal
characters or 13 ASCII characters.
— For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal
characters or 16 ASCII characters.
Enable WPA Mode
Follow this step to enable WPA on an SSID/VLAN pair:
1. Set Security Mode to WPA.
4-144
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Enable WPA-PSK Mode
Follow these steps to enable WPA-PSK on an SSID/VLAN pair:
1. Set Security Mode to WPA-PSK.
2. Configure the Pre-Shared Key.
3. Enter a phrase in the PSK Pass Phrase field. The AP will
automatically generate a Pre-Shared Key based on the phrase you
enter. You must also configure your clients to use this same key.
Enter between 8 and 63 characters; Avaya recommends using a
pass phrase of at least 13 characters, including both numbers and
upper and lower case letters, to ensure that the generated key
cannot be easily deciphered by network infiltrators.
4. When finished configuring all parameters, click OK.
5. If you selected a Security Mode of 802.1x, Mixed Mode, or WPA
you must configure a Radius 802.1x/EAP server (see RADIUS
Authentication with 802.1x for details).
6. Click Edit if you want to modify an existing entry. You can also
disable or delete an entry from the Edit screen.
NOTE:
When editing the primary Network Name (SSID) entry, disabling or
deleting that entry is not allowed.
7. Click the tab for the second wireless interface (if applicable) and
create or modify SSID/VLAN entries as necessary.
8. Reboot the AP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-145
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Typical VLAN Management Configurations
Control Access to the AP
Management access to the AP can easily be secured by making
management stations or hosts and the AP itself members of a common
VLAN. Simply configure a non-zero management VLAN ID and enable
VLAN to restrict management of the AP to members of the same VLAN.
! CAUTION:
If a non-zero management VLAN ID is configured then management
access to the AP is restricted to wired or wireless hosts that are members
of the same VLAN. Ensure your management platform or host is a member of the same VLAN before attempting to manage the AP.
1. Click Configure > SSID/VLAN/Security.
2. Set the VLAN Management ID to a value between 0 and 4094 (a
value of 0 disables VLAN management).
3. Place a check mark in the Enable VLAN Protocol box.
Provide Access to a Wireless Host in the Same Workgroup
The VLAN feature can allow wireless clients to manage the AP. If the
VLAN Management ID matches a VLAN User ID, then those wireless
clients who are members of that VLAN will have AP management access.
4-146
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
! CAUTION:
Once a VLAN Management ID is configured and is equivalent to one of
the VLAN User IDs on the AP, all members of that User VLAN will have
management access to the AP. Be careful to restrict VLAN membership to
those with legitimate access to the AP.
1. Click Configure > VLAN.
2. Set the VLAN Management ID to use the same VLAN ID as one
of the configured SSID/VLAN pairs. See Typical User VLAN
Configurations for details.
3. Place a check mark in the Enable VLAN Protocol box.
Disable VLAN Management
1. Click Configure > SSID/VLAN/Security.
2. Remove the check mark from the Enable VLAN Protocol box to
disable all VLAN functionality.
MAC Access
The MAC Access tab allows you to build a list of stations, identified by
their MAC addresses, authorized to access the network through the AP.
The list is stored inside each AP within your network. Note that you must
reboot the AP for any changes to the MAC Access Control Table to take
effect.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-147
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
• Enable MAC Access Control: Check this box to enable the Control
Table.
• Operation Type: Choose between Passthru and Block. This
determines how the stations identified in the MAC Access Control
Table are filtered.
— If set to Passthru, only the addresses listed in the Control
Table will pass through the bridge.
— If set to Block, the bridge will block traffic to or from the
addresses listed in the Control Table.
• MAC Access Control Table: Click Add to create a new entry. Click
Edit to change an existing entry. Each entry contains the following
field:
— MAC Address: Enter the wireless client’s MAC address.
— Comment: Enter an optional comment such as the client’s
name.
• Status: The entry is enabled automatically when saved (so the
Status field is only visible when editing an entry). You can also
disable or delete entries by changing this field’s value.
NOTE:
For larger networks that include multiple Access Points, you may
prefer to maintain this list on a centralized location using the MAC
Access Control by Means of RADIUS Authentication.
4-148
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Figure 4-20.
MAC Access Configuration Screen
Rogue Access Point Detection (RAD)
The Rogue AP Detection (RAD) feature provides an additional security
level for wireless LAN deployments. Rogue AP detection provides a
mechanism for detecting Rogue Access Points by utilizing the coverage
of the trusted Access Point deployment.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-149
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
The Rogue AP Scan employs background scanning using low-level
802.11 scanning functions for effective wireless detection of Access
Points in its coverage area with minimal impact on the normal operation of
the Access Point.
This RAD feature can be enabled on an Access Point via its HTTP, CLI, or
SNMP Interfaces. The scan repetition duration is configurable. The
Access Point will periodically scan the wireless network and report all the
available Access Points within its coverage area using SNMP traps. For
additional reliability the results are stored in the Access Point in a table,
which can be queried via SNMP. The BSSID and Channel number of the
detected Access Points are provided in the scan results.
The RAD scan is done on a channel list initialized based on the regulatory
domain of the device. The RAD Scan then performs background scanning
on all the channels in this channel list using 802.11 MAC scanning
functions. It will either actively scan the network by sending probe
requests or passively scan by only listening for beacons. The access
point information is then gathered from the probe responses and
beacons.
To minimize traffic disruption and maximize the scanning efficiency, the
RAD feature employs an enhanced background-scanning algorithm and
uses the CTS to Self mechanism to keep the clients silent. The scanning
algorithm allows traffic to be serviced between each channel scan. Before
start of every scan (except scan on the working channel) the CTS to
self-mechanism is used to set the NAV values of clients to keep them
silent during the scanning period. In addition, the scan repetition duration
can also be configured to reduce the frequency of RAD scan cycles to
maximize Access Point performance.
4-150
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
RAD Configuration Requirements
The RAD feature can be configured/monitored via the HTTP, CLI, or
SNMP management interfaces.
The following management options are provided:
• The RAD feature can be enabled or disabled.
• The repetition interval of RAD can be configured.
• SNMP Traps are sent after completion of a RAD scan cycle and also
whenever a new Access Point is detected.
• Additionally, the RAD scan results are maintained in a table that can
be queried via SNMP. The system administrator has to enable RAD
on the Access Points in the wireless network and also configure the
Trap Host on all these Access Points to the IP address of the
management station. The Access Points on detecting a new Access
Point sends a RAD Scan Result Trap to the management station.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-151
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Figure 4-21.
Example Rogue AP Detection Deployment
An example network deployment is shown. The Trusted AP has Rogue
Access Detection enabled and the trap host is configured to be the
management station. The Trusted AP on detecting the Rogue AP will
send a trap to the management station with the Channel and BSSID of
the Rogue Access Point.
4-152
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Configuring RAD
Perform this procedure to enable RAD and define the Scan Interval.
The RAD screen also displays the time of the last scan and the number of
new access points detected in the last scan.
1. Enable the Security Alarm Group. Select the Security Alarm Group
link from the RAD screen. Configure a Trap Host to receive the list
of access points detected during the scan.
2. Click Configure > Security > RAD.
3. Enable RAD by checking Enable Rogue AP Detection.
4. Enter the Scan Interval.
The Scan Interval specifies the time period in minutes between
scans and can be set to any value between 15 and 1440 minutes.
5. Click OK.
The results of the RAD scan be viewed in the Status page in the HTTP
interface.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-153
Configure Multiple SSID/VLAN/Security Mode Entries
Figure 4-22.
4-154
Rogue Access Point Detection Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
RADIUS
The AP communicates with a network’s RADIUS server to provide the
following features:
• MAC Access Control by Means of RADIUS Authentication
• RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x
• RADIUS Accounting
The network administrator can configure multiple RADIUS Authentication
Servers for different Authentication types. The current available
authentication types are EAP/802.1x authentication and MAC-based
authentication.You can configure two separate sets of Primary and
Secondary RADIUS Servers for each of the two supported Authentication
types, 802.1x EAP Based authentication and MAC based authentication.
You can configure the AP to communicate with up to six different RADIUS
servers:
• Primary Authentication Server (MAC-based authentication)
• Back-up Authentication Server (MAC-based authentication)
• Primary Authentication Server (EAP/802.1x authentication)
• Back-up Authentication Server (EAP/802.1x authentication)
• Primary Accounting Server
• Back-up Accounting Server
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-155
RADIUS
NOTE:
You must have configured the settings for at least one
Authentication server before configuring the settings for an
Accounting server.
The back-up servers are optional, but when configured, the AP will
communicate with the back-up server if the primary server is off-line. After
the AP has switched to the backup server, it will periodically check the
status of the primary RADIUS server every five (5) minutes. Once the
primary RADIUS server is again online, the AP automatically reverts from
the backup RADIUS server back to the primary RADIUS server. All
subsequent requests are then sent to the primary RADIUS server.
You can view monitoring statistics for each of the configured RADIUS
servers.
MAC Access Control by Means of RADIUS Authentication
If you want to control wireless access to the network and if your network
includes a RADIUS Server, you can store the list of MAC addresses on
the RADIUS server rather than configure each AP individually. From the
RADIUS Authentication tab, you can define the IP Address of the server
that contains a central list of MAC Address values that identify the
authorized stations that may access the wireless network. You must
specify information for at least the primary RADIUS server. The back-up
RADIUS server is optional.
4-156
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
NOTE:
Contact your RADIUS server manufacturer if you have problems
configuring the server or have problems using RADIUS
authentication.
Follow these steps to enable RADIUS MAC Access Control:
1. Within the RADIUS Auth screen, place a check mark in the box
labeled Enable RADIUS MAC Access Control.
2. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS
Authentication Server.
3. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check
mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Authentication
Server.
4. Enter the time, in seconds, each client session may be active
before being automatically re-authenticated in the Authorization
Lifetime field. The Authorization Lifetime default is 0
(reauthentication is disabled). The configurable range is from 900
seconds to 43200 seconds.
NOTE:
Authorization Lifetime is used for MAC authenticated clients and
802.1x clients. Setting Authorization Lifetime in the RADIUS Auth
tab will also effect EAP/802.1x Authorization clients.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-157
RADIUS
5. Select a MAC Address Format Type. This should correspond to
the format in which the clients’ 12-digit MAC addresses are listed
within the RADIUS server. Available options include:
— Dash delimited: dash between each pair of digits:
xx-yy-zz-aa-bb-cc
— Colon delimited: colon between each pair of digits:
xx:yy:zz:aa:bb:cc)
— Single dash delimited: dash between the sixth and seventh
digits: xxyyzz-aabbcc
— No delimiters: No characters or spaces between pairs of
hexadecimal digits: xxyyzzaabbcc
6. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
— If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must
configure the AP as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details.
7. Enter the server’s IP address or name in the field provided.
8. Enter the port number which the AP and the server will use to
communicate. By default, RADIUS servers communicate on port
1812.
9. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm
Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS
server and the AP. The same password must also be configured on
the RADIUS server.
10. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP should wait for
the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time
field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds.
4-158
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
11. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request
may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field.
Range is 0-4; default is 3.
12. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 6 through 11
for the back-up server.
13. Click OK to save your changes.
14. Reboot the AP for these changes to take effect.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-159
RADIUS
Figure 4-23.
4-160
RADIUS MAC-Based Access Control Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x
You must configure a primary EAP/802.1x Authentication server to use
802.1x security. A back-up server is optional.
NOTE:
Problems with RADIUS Server configuration or RADIUS
Authentication should be referred to the RADIUS Server developer.
Follow these steps to enable a RADIUS Authentication server for 802.1x
security:
1. Click the RADIUS tab.
2. Click the EAP/802.1x sub-tab.
3. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary
EAP/802.1x Authentication Server.
4. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check
mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up EAP/802.1x
Authentication Server.
5. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
— If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must
configure the AP as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details.
6. Enter the server’s IP address or name in the field provided.
7. Enter the port number which the AP and the server will use to
communicate. By default, RADIUS servers communicate on port
1812.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-161
RADIUS
8. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm
Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS
server and the AP. The same password must also be configured
on the RADIUS server.
9. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP should wait for
the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time
field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds.
10. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request
may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field.
Range is 1-4; default is 3.
11. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 7 through 12
for the back-up server.
12. Click OK to save your changes.
13. Click the RADIUS Auth sub-tab. Enter the time, in seconds, each
client session may be active before being automatically
re-authenticated in the Authorization Lifetime field. The
Authorization Lifetime default is 0 (reauthentication is disabled).
The configurable range is from 900 seconds to 43200 seconds.
NOTE:
Authorization Lifetime is used for MAC authenticated clients and
802.1x clients. Setting Authorization Lifetime in the RADIUS Auth
tab will also effect EAP/802.1x Authorization clients.
14. Click OK to save your changes.
15. Reboot the AP device for these changes to take effect.
4-162
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
Figure 4-24.
RADIUS EAP/802.1x Authentication Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-163
RADIUS
RADIUS Accounting
Using an external RADIUS server, the AP can track and record the length
of client sessions on the access point by sending RADIUS accounting
messages per RFC2866. When a wireless client is successfully
authenticated, RADIUS accounting is initiated by sending an “Accounting
Start” request to the RADIUS server. When the wireless client session
ends, an “Accounting Stop” request is sent to the RADIUS server.
Session Length
Accounting sessions continue when a client reauthenticates to the same
AP. Sessions are terminated when:
• A client disassociates.
• A client does not transmit any data to the AP for a fixed amount of
time.
• A client is detected on a different interface.
If the client roams from one AP to another, one session is terminated and
a new session is begun.
NOTE:
This feature requires RADIUS authentication using MAC Access
Control or 802.1x. Wireless clients configured in the Access Point’s
static MAC Access Control list are not tracked.
4-164
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
Configuring RADIUS Accounting
Follow these steps to enable RADIUS accounting on the AP:
NOTE:
For RADIUS accounting to work, you must first enable RADIUS
authentication as follows:
1. In the RADIUS Auth screen, place a check mark in the box
labeled Enable RADIUS MAC Access Control.
2. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS
Authentication Server.
3. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check
mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Authentication
Server.
4. Enter the time, in seconds, each client session may be active
before being automatically re-authenticated in the Authorization
Lifetime field. The Authorization Lifetime default is 0
(reauthentication is disabled). The configurable range is from 900
seconds to 43200 seconds.
5. Select a MAC Address Format Type. This should correspond to
the format in which the clients’ 12-digit MAC addresses are listed
within the RADIUS server. Available options include:
— Dash delimited: dash between each pair of digits:
xx-yy-zz-aa-bb-cc
— Colon delimited: colon between each pair of digits:
xx:yy:zz:aa:bb:cc)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-165
RADIUS
— Single dash delimited: dash between the sixth and seventh
digits: xxyyzz-aabbcc
— No delimiters: No characters or spaces between pairs of
hexadecimal digits: xxyyzzaabbcc
6. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must
configure the AP as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details.
7. Enter the server’s IP address or name in the field provided.
8. Enter the port number which the AP and the server will use to
communicate. By default, RADIUS servers communicate on port
1812.
9. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm
Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS
server and the AP. The same password must also be configured on
the RADIUS server.
10. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP should wait for
the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time
field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds.
11. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request
may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field.
Range is 0-4; default is 3.
12. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 6 through 11
for the back-up server.
13. Click OK to save your changes.
4-166
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
Now that Radius authentication is enabled and configured, configure
Radius Accounting as follows:
14. Within the RADIUS Accounting Configuration screen, place a
check mark in the Enable RADIUS Accounting box to turn on this
feature.
15. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS
Accounting Server.
16. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check
mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Accounting
Server.
17. Enter the session timeout interval in minutes within the
Accounting Inactivity Timer field. An accounting session
automatically ends for a client that is idle for the period of time
specified. Range is 1-60 minutes; default is 5 minutes.
18. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
— If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must
configure the Access Point as a DNS Client. See DNS Client
for details.
19. Enter the server’s IP address or name in the field provided.
20. Enter the port number which the AP and the server will use to
communicate. By default, RADIUS accounting uses port 1813.
21. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm
Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS
server and the AP. The same password must also be configured on
the RADIUS server.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-167
RADIUS
22. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP should wait for
the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time
field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds.
23. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request
may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field.
Range is 1-4; default is 3.
24. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 5 through 10
for the back-up server.
25. Enable RADIUS accounting and click OK to save your changes.
26. Reboot the AP device for these changes to take effect.
4-168
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS
Figure 4-25.
RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
4-169
RADIUS
4-170
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Monitor Information
5
In This Chapter
• Logging into the HTTP Interface
• Version: Provides version information for the Access Point’s system
components.
• ICMP: Displays statistics for Internet Control Message Protocol
packets sent and received by the AP.
• IP/ARP Table: Displays the AP’s IP Address Resolution table.
• Learn Table: Displays the list of nodes that the AP has learned are
on the network.
• IAPP: Provides statistics for the Inter-Access Point Protocol
messages sent and received by the AP.
• RADIUS: Provides statistics for the configured primary and backup
RADIUS server(s).
• Interfaces: Displays the Access Point’s interface statistics (Wireless
and Ethernet).
• Link Test: Evaluates the link with a wireless client.
• Station Statistics: Displays statistics for stations and Wireless
Distribution System links.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Once the AP has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may
use your web browser to monitor network statistics.
The Command Line Interface (CLI) also provides a method for viewing
network statistics using Telnet or a serial connection. This section covers
only use of the HTTP interface. For more information about viewing
network statistics with the CLI, refer to The Command Line Interface.
Follow these steps to monitor an AP’s operating statistics using the HTTP
interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer.
NOTE:
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
5-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Logging into the HTTP Interface
2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet
Explorer users, follow these steps:
— Select Tools > Internet Options....
— Click the Connections tab.
— Click LAN Settings....
— If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy
server box.
— Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet
Explorer.
3. Enter the Access Point’s IP address in the browser’s Address field
and press Enter.
— Result: The AP Enter Network Password screen appears.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-3
Logging into the HTTP Interface
4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK.
Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password
is “public”).
— Result: The System Status screen appears.
Figure 5-1.
Enter Network Password Screen
5. Click the Monitor button located on the left-hand side of the
screen.
5-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Figure 5-2.
Monitor Main Screen
6. Click the tab that corresponds to the statistics you want to review.
For example, click Learn Table to see the list of nodes that the AP
has discovered on the network.
7. If applicable, click the Refresh button to update the statistics.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-5
Version
Version
From the HTTP interface, click the Monitor button and select the Version
tab. The list displayed provides you with information that may be pertinent
when calling Technical Support. With this information, your Technical
Support representative can verify compatibility issues and make sure the
latest software are loaded. This screen displays the following information
for each Access Point component:
• Serial Number: The component’s serial number, if applicable.
• Component Name
• ID: The AP identifies a system component based on its ID. Each
component has a unique identifier.
• Variant: Several variants may exist of the same component (for
example, a hardware component may have two variants, one with
more memory than the other).
• Version: Specifies the component’s version or build number. The
Software Image version is the most useful information on this screen
for the typical end user.
5-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Version
Figure 5-3.
Version Information Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-7
ICMP
ICMP
This tab provides statistical information for both received and transmitted
messages directed to the AP. Not all ICMP traffic on the network is
counted in the ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) statistics.
Figure 5-4.
5-8
ICMP Monitoring Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
IP/ARP Table
IP/ARP Table
This tab provides information based on the Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP), which relates MAC Address and IP Addresses.
Figure 5-5.
IP/ARP Table
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-9
Learn Table
Learn Table
This tab displays information relating to network bridging. It reports the
MAC address for each node that the device has learned is on the network
and the interface on which the node was detected. There can be up
10,000 entries in the Learn Table.
Figure 5-6.
5-10
Learn Table
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
IAPP
IAPP
This tab displays statistics relating to client handovers and
communications between Avaya Wireless Access Points.
Figure 5-7.
IAPP Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-11
RADIUS
RADIUS
This tab provides RADIUS authentication, EAP/802.1x authentication,
and accounting information for both the Primary and Backup RADIUS
servers.
NOTE:
RADIUS authentication and accounting must be enabled for this
information to be valid.
5-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Interfaces
Figure 5-8.
RADIUS Monitoring Screen
Interfaces
This tab displays statistics for the Ethernet and wireless interfaces. The
Operational Status can be up, down, or testing.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-13
Interfaces
Figure 5-9.
5-14
Wireless Interface Monitoring
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Link Test
Link Test
This tab displays information on the quality of the wireless link to clients
and other APs in the Wireless Distribution System. During a Link Test, the
Access Point and the selected device exchange a series of packets to
test the strength of the connection. The devices start by exchanging
packets at the 11 Mbits/sec rate but fall back to the slower rates if
necessary.
NOTE:
This feature is not available for an 802.11b/g AP. Also, this feature
is not available if you are using a non-Avaya Wireless client with an
802.11b AP.
Follow these steps to perform a Link Test:
1. Open the Remote Link Test screen.
2. Click Explore.
Result: A list of detected stations will appear. If the list does not
appear automatically, click Refresh.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-15
Link Test
Figure 5-10.
Remote Link Test Screen
3. Select a Station from the list by clicking the circle to the left of the
Station’s entry.
4. Click Link Test to start the test.
Result: A new Link Test window opens and displays the following
information for the Access Point (referred to as the Initiator
Station) and the wireless client (referred to as the Remote
Station):
— Station Name: The Access Point’s System Name or the
client’s Windows Networking name.
— MAC Address
5-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Link Test
— SNR (dB): The Signal to Noise ratio for the received signal.
The displayed value is the running average since the start of
the test and is reported in decibels (dB). Higher numbers
correspond to a stronger link. The bar graph also displays the
relative strength of the link (a green bar indicates a strong link,
a yellow bar indicates a fair link, and a red bar indicates a
weak link).
— Signal (dBm): The strength of the received signal in dBm
(decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt). The displayed value is the
running average since the start of the test and is reported as a
negative number. Higher numbers correspond to a stronger
link. For example, -40 dBm corresponds to a stronger signal
than -50 dBm. The bar graph also displays the relative
strength of the signal (a longer bar represents a stronger
signal).
— Noise (dBm): The strength of the noise detected at the
receiver reported in dBm (decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt).
The displayed value is the running average since the start of
the test and is reported as a negative number. Noise can
interfere with the received signal so a smaller noise value
corresponds to a stronger link. For example, a noise level of
-95 dBm is more desirable than a noise level of -89 dBm. The
bar graph displays the relative strength of the noise level (a
shorter bar represents a weaker noise level and is more
desirable than a longer bar).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-17
Link Test
— 11 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 11
Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test. In
general, most packets will be received at the 11 Mbits/sec rate
if the devices have a strong link.
— 5.5 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 5.5
Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test.
— 2 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 2
Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test.
— 1 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 1
Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test.
NOTE:
Click the Refresh button periodically to update the test results. The
test screen does not refresh automatically.
5-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Link Test
Figure 5-11.
SNR Report Screen
5. Click Close to end the Link Test.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-19
Station Statistics
Station Statistics
This tab displays information on wireless clients attached to the AP and
on Wireless Distribution System links.
Enabling and Viewing Station Statistics
To enable the monitoring of Stations Statistics, perform the following
procedure:
1. Click on the Monitor tab on the left on the web page.
2. Click on the Station Statistics tab on the Monitor screen.
3. Enable the Monitoring Station Statistics feature (Station Statistics
are disabled by default) by checking Enable Monitoring Station
Statistics and click OK.
You do not need to reboot the AP for the changes to take effect. If clients
are connected to the device or WDS links are configured for the device,
the statistics will now be shown on the screen.
Refreshing Station Statistics
Click on the Refresh button in the browser window to view the latest
statistics. If any new clients associate to the AP, you can see the statistics
of the new clients after you click the refresh button.
5-20
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Station Statistics
Figure 5-12.
Station Statistics Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-21
Station Statistics
Description of Station Statistics
The following stations statistics are displayed:
• MAC Address: The MAC address of the wireless client for which the
statistics are gathered. For WDS links, this is the partner MAC
address of the link.
• IP Address: The IP address of the associated wireless station for
which the Statistics are gathered. (0.0.0.0 for WDS links)
• Interface to which the Station is connected: The interface
number on which the client is connected with the AP. For WDS links
this is the interface on which the link is configured.
• Station Type: The type of wireless client (STA or WDS).
• MAC Protocol: The MAC protocol for this wireless client (or WDS
link partner). The possible values are 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g
• Signal / Noise: The Signal /Noise Level measured at the AP when
frames are received from the associated wireless station (or WDS
link partner)
• Time since Last Packet Received: The time elapsed since the last
frame from the associated wireless station (or WDS link partner)
was received.
• Number of Clients: The number of stations and WDS links
monitored.
5-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Station Statistics
The following stations statistics are not displayed in the Graphical User
Interface, but can be viewed from a MIB browser:
• Octets Received: The number of octets received from the
associated wireless station (or WDS link partner) by the AP.
• Unicast Frames Received: The number of Unicast frames received
from the associated wireless station (or WDS link partner) by the
AP.
• Non-Unicast Frames Received: The number of Non-Unicast
frames received (i.e. broadcast or multicast) from the associated
wireless station (or WDS link partner) by the AP.
• Octets Transmitted: The number of octets sent to the associated
wireless station (or WDS link partner) from the AP.
• Unicast Frames Transmitted: The number of Unicast frames
transmitted to the associated wireless station (or WDS link partner)
from the AP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
5-23
Station Statistics
5-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Commands
6
In This Chapter
• Logging into the HTTP Interface
• Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP: Describes the
available file transfer methods.
• Update AP by Using TFTP: Download files from a TFTP server to the
AP.
• Update AP by Using HTTP: Download files to the AP from HTTP.
• Upload File by Using TFTP: Upload configuration files from the AP to
a TFTP server.
• Upload File by Using HTTP: Upload configuration files from the AP
by using HTTP.
• Reboot: Reboot the AP in the specified number of seconds.
• Reset: Reset all of the Access Point’s configuration settings to
factory defaults.
• Help Link: Configure the location where the AP Help files can be
found.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-1
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Logging into the HTTP Interface
Once the AP has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may
use your web browser to issue commands.
The Command Line Interface (CLI) also provides a method for issuing
commands using Telnet or a serial connection. This section covers only
use of the HTTP Interface. For more information about issuing commands
with the CLI, refer to The Command Line Interface.
Follow these steps to view the available commands supported by the
AP’s HTTP interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer.
NOTE:
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
6-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Logging into the HTTP Interface
2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet
Explorer users, follow these steps:
— Select Tools > Internet Options....
— Click the Connections tab.
— Click LAN Settings....
— If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy
server box.
— Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet
Explorer.
3. Enter the Access Point’s IP address in the browser’s Address field
and press Enter.
— Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-3
Logging into the HTTP Interface
4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK.
Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password
is “public”).
— Result: The System Status screen appears.
Figure 6-1.
Enter Network Password Screen
5. Click the Commands button located on the left-hand side of the
screen.
6-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP
Figure 6-2.
Commands Main Screen
6. Click the tab that corresponds to the command you want to issue.
For example, click Reboot to restart the unit.
Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP
There are two methods of transferring files to or from the AP, TFTP or
HTTP (or HTTPS if enabled).
The following procedures describe downloading Configuration, AP Image,
Bootloader, Private Key, and Certificate files to the AP:
• Update AP by Using TFTP
• Update AP by Using HTTP
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-5
Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP
The following procedures describe uploading Configuration files from the
AP:
• Upload File by Using TFTP
• Upload File by Using HTTP
TFTP File Transfer Guidelines
A TFTP server must be running and configured to point to the directory
containing the file.
If you do not have a TFTP server installed on your system, install the
TFTP server from the Avaya Wireless CD.
HTTP File Transfer Guidelines
HTTP file transfer can be performed either with or without SSL enabled.
HTTP file transfers with SSL require enabling Secure Management and
Secure Socket Layer. HTTP transfers that use SSL may take additional
time.
NOTE:
SSL requires Internet Explorer version 6, 128 bit encryption, Service
Pack 1, and patch Q323308.
6-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Introduction to File Transfer via TFTP or HTTP
Image Error Checking during File Transfer
The Access Point performs checks to verify that an image downloaded
through HTTP or TFTP is valid. The following checks are performed on
the downloaded image:
• Zero Image size
• Large image size
• Non VxWorks image
• AP image
• Digital signature verification
If any of the above checks fail on the downloaded image, the Access
Point deletes the downloaded image and retains the old image.
Otherwise, if all checks pass successfully, the AP deletes the old image
and retains the downloaded image.
These checks ensure that the AP does not enter an invalid image state.
The storage of the two images is only temporary to ensure the proper
verification; the two images are not be stored in the AP permanently.
Image error checking functions automatically in the background. No user
configuration is required.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-7
Update AP by Using TFTP
Update AP by Using TFTP
Use the Update AP via TFTP tab to download Configuration, AP Image,
Bootloader files, and Certificate and Private Key files to the AP. A TFTP
server must be running and configured to point to the directory containing
the file.
If you do not have a TFTP server installed on your system, install the
TFTP server from the Avaya Wireless CD. You can either install the TFTP
server from the CD Wizard or run OEM-TFTP-Server.exe found in the
CD’s Xtras/SolarWinds sub-directory.
1. Once on the Update AP screen, click on the via TFTP tab.
The Update AP via TFTP tab shows version information and
allows you to enter TFTP information as described below.
6-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Update AP by Using TFTP
Figure 6-3.
Update AP via TFTP Command Screen
2. In the Server IP Address field, enter the TFTP server IP Address.
To locate the IP address assigned to the TFTP server, double-click
the TFTP server icon on your desktop.
NOTE:
This is the IP address that will be used to point the Access Point to
the AP Image file.
3. In the File Name field, enter the name of the file to be downloaded
(including the file extension).
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-9
Update AP by Using TFTP
Copy the updated AP Image file to the TFTP server’s root folder.
The default AP Image is located at C:/Program Files/Avaya_
Wireless/AP600/.
4. In the File Type field, select the proper file type. Choices include:
— Config for configuration information, such as System Name,
Contact Name, and so on.
— Image for the AP Image (executable program).
— BspBl for the Bootloader software.
— Certificate: the digital certificate for authentication in SSL
communications.
— Private Key: the private key for encryption in SSL
communications.
5. In the File Operation field, select either Update AP or Update AP
& Reboot. You should reboot the AP after downloading files.
6-10
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Update AP by Using HTTP
Update AP by Using HTTP
Use the Update AP via HTTP tab to download Configuration, AP Image,
Bootloader files, and Certificate and Private Key files to the AP.
1. Once on the Update AP screen, click on the via HTTP tab.
The Update AP via HTTP tab shows version information and
allows you to enter HTTP information as described below.
Figure 6-4.
Update AP via HTTP Command Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-11
Update AP by Using HTTP
2. Select the File Type that needs to be updated from the drop-down
box. Choices include:
— Config for configuration information, such as System Name,
Contact Name, and so on.
— Image for the AP Image (executable program).
— Bsp/Bl for the Bootloader software.
— Certificate: the digital certificate for authentication in SSL
communications.
— Private Key: the private key for encryption in SSL
communications.
3. Use the Browse button or manually type in the name of the file to
be downloaded (including the file extension) in the File Name field.
If typing the file name, you must include the full path and the file
extension in the file name text box.
4. To initiate the HTTP Update operation, click the Update AP button.
The AP displays a message that advises you to reboot the device
for the changes to take effect.
Figure 6-5.
6-12
System Message
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Update AP by Using HTTP
5. Click OK to continue with the operation or Cancel to abort the
operation.
NOTE:
An HTTP file transfer using SSL may take extra time.
If the operation completes successfully the following screen
appears.
Figure 6-6.
Update AP Successful
If the operation did not complete successfully the following screen
appears, and the reason for the failure is displayed.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-13
Upload File by Using TFTP
Figure 6-7.
Update AP Unsuccessful
Upload File by Using TFTP
Use the Retrieve File via TFTP tab to upload Configuration files from the
AP to a TFTP server. The TFTP server must be running and configured to
point to the directory to which you want to copy the uploaded file. We
suggest you assign the file a meaningful name, which may include
version or location information.
If you do not have a TFTP server installed on your system, install the
TFTP server from the Avaya Wireless CD. You can either install the TFTP
server from the CD Wizard or run OEM-TFTP-Server.exe found in the
CD’s Xtras/SolarWinds sub-directory.
6-14
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Upload File by Using TFTP
1. Once on the Retrieve File screen, click on the via TFTP tab.
The Retrieve AP via TFTP tab shows version information and
allows you to enter TFTP information as described below.
Figure 6-8.
Retrieve File via TFTP Command Screen
2. In the Server IP Address field, enter the TFTP server IP Address.
To locate the IP address assigned to the TFTP server, double-click
the TFTP server icon on your desktop.
3. In the File Name field, enter the name of the file to be uploaded.
4. Click the Retrieve Config File button to initiate the upload of the
Configuration file from the AP to the TFTP server.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-15
Upload File by Using HTTP
NOTE:
For information on how to download the file from the TFTP server to
the AP, see Update AP by Using TFTP.
Upload File by Using HTTP
Use the Retrieve File via HTTP tab to upload the configuration file from
the AP.
1. Once on the Retrieve File screen, click the via HTTP tab. The
Retrieve File via HTTP tab shows version information.
Figure 6-9.
6-16
Retrieve File via HTTP Command Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Upload File by Using HTTP
2. Click on the Retrieve Config File button to initiate this operation.
The AP displays a confirmation message that asks if you want to
proceed with retrieving the configuration file.
Figure 6-10.
Retrieve File Confirmation Message
3. Click OK to continue with the operation or Cancel to abort the
operation. The File Download dialog box is displayed.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-17
Upload File by Using HTTP
Figure 6-11.
File Download Dialog Box
4. On clicking the Save button the following Save As window
displays, where the you are prompted to choose the filename and
location where the Configuration file is to be downloaded.
6-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Reboot
Figure 6-12.
Retrieve File Save As Dialog
5. Select an appropriate filename and location and click OK.
Reboot
Use the Reboot tab to save configuration changes (if any) and reset the
AP. Entering a value of 0 (zero) seconds causes an immediate reboot.
Note that Reset, described below, does not save configuration changes.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-19
Reboot
! CAUTION:
Rebooting the AP will cause all users who are currently connected to lose
their connection to the network until the AP has completed the restart process and resumed operation.
Figure 6-13.
6-20
Reboot Command Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Reset
Reset
Use the Reset tab to restore the AP to factory default conditions. The AP
may also be reset from the RESET button located on the side of the unit.
Since this will reset the Access Point’s current IP address, a new IP
address must be assigned. Refer to Recovery Procedures for more
information.
! CAUTION:
Resetting the AP to its factory default configuration will permanently overwrite all changes that have made to the unit. The AP will reboot automatically after this command has been issued.
Figure 6-14.
Reset to Factory Defaults Command Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-21
Help Link
Help Link
To open Help, click the Help button on any display screen.
During initialization, the AP on-line help files are downloaded to the
default location: C:/Program Files/Avaya_
Wireless/AP/HTML/index.htm.
NOTE:
Use the forward slash character (/) rather than the back slash
character (\) when configuring the Help Link location.
NOTE:
Add the AP’s management IP address to the Internet Explorer list of
Trusted Sites.
The Avaya Wireless AP Help information is available in English, French,
German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese. The Help files are copied to your
computer in one language only.
If you want to place these files on a shared drive, copy the Help Folder to
the new location, and then specify the new path in the Help Link box.
6-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Help Link
Figure 6-15.
Help Link Configuration Screen
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
6-23
Help Link
6-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Troubleshooting
7
In This Chapter
• Troubleshooting Concepts
• Symptoms and Solutions
• Recovery Procedures
• Related Applications
NOTE:
This section helps you locate problems related to the AP device
setup. For details about RADIUS, TFTP, serial communication
programs (such as HyperTerminal), Telnet applications, or web
browsers, please refer to the documentation that came with the
application for assistance.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-1
Troubleshooting Concepts
Troubleshooting Concepts
The following list identifies important troubleshooting concepts and topics.
The most common initialization and installation problems relate to IP
addressing. For example, you must have valid IP addresses for both the
AP and the management computer to access the unit’s HTTP interface.
• IP Address management is fundamental.
• Factory default units are set for “Dynamic” (DHCP) IP Address
assignment. The default IP address for the AP is 169.254.128.132
if your network does not have a DHCP server. If you connect the AP
to a network with an active DHCP server, then use ScanTool to
locate the IP address of your unit. If a DHCP server is not active on
your subnet, then use ScanTool to assign a static IP address to the
unit.
• The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) provides a means to
download and upload files. These files include the AP Image
(executable program) and configuration files.
• If the AP password is lost or forgotten, you will need to reset to
default values. The Reset to Factory Default Procedure resets
configuration, but does not change the current AP Image.
• If all else fails… Use the Forced Reload Procedure to erase the
current AP Image and then download a new image. Once the new
image is loaded, use the Reset to Factory Default Procedure to set
the unit to factory default values and reconfigure the unit.
7-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
• The AP Supports a Command Line Interface (CLI). If you are
having trouble locating your AP on the network, connect to the unit
directly using the serial interface and refer to The Command Line
Interface for CLI command syntax and parameter names.
Symptoms and Solutions
Connectivity Issues
Connectivity issues include any problem that prevents you from powering
up or connecting to the AP.
AP Unit Will Not Boot - No LED Activity
1. Make sure your power source is operating.
2. Make sure all cables are connected to the AP correctly.
3. If you are using Power over Ethernet, make sure you are using a
Category 5, foiled, twisted pair cable to power the AP.
Serial Link Does Not Work
1. Make sure you are using a standard, straight-through, 9-pin serial
cable.
2. Double-check the physical network connections.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-3
Symptoms and Solutions
3. Make sure your PC terminal program (such as HyperTerminal) is
active and configured to the following values:
— Com Port: (COM1, COM2, etc. depending on your computer);
— Baud rate: 9600; Data bits: 8; Stop bits: 1; Flow Control: None;
Parity: None;
— Line Feeds with Carriage Returns
(In HyperTerminal select:
File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup -> Send Line
Ends with Line Feeds)
Ethernet Link Does Not Work
1. Double-check the physical network connections. Use a
known-good unit to make sure the network connection is present.
Once you have the AP IP address, you can use the “Ping”
command over Ethernet to test the IP Address. If the AP responds
to the Ping, then the Ethernet Interface is working properly.
2. By default, the Access Point will attempt to automatically detect the
Ethernet settings. However, if you are having problems with the
Ethernet link, manually configure the Access Point’s Ethernet
settings. For example, if your switch operates at 100 Mbits/sec/Full
Duplex, manually configure the Access Point to use these settings
(see Ethernet). If you cannot access the unit over Ethernet, then
use the CLI interface over the serial port to configure the Ethernet
port (see The Command Line Interface and Syntax Examples).
3. Perform network infrastructure troubleshooting (check switches,
routers, etc.).
7-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
Basic Software Setup and Configuration Problems
Lost AP, Telnet, or SNMP Password
1. Perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure in this guide. This
procedure resets system and network parameters, but does not
affect the AP Image.
The default AP HTTP password is “public”, and the default Telnet
password is also “public”.
Client Computer Cannot Connect
1. Client computers should have the same Network Name and
security settings as the AP.
2. Network Names should be allocated and maintained by the
Network Administrator.
3. Refer to the documentation that came with your client card for
additional troubleshooting suggestions.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-5
Symptoms and Solutions
AP Has Incorrect IP Address
1. Default IP Address Assignment mode is dynamic (DHCP). If you
do not have a DHCP server on your network, the default IP
Address is 169.254.128.132. If you have more than one
unintialized AP connected to the network, they will all have the
same default IP address and you will not be able to communicate
with them (due to an IP address conflict). In this case, assign each
AP a static IP address via the serial cable or turn off all units but
one and change the IP address using ScanTool one at a time.
2. The AP only contacts a DHCP server during boot-up. If your
network’s DHCP server is not available while the AP is booting, the
device will retain the last IP Address it had. Reboot the AP once
your DHCP server is on-line again or use the ScanTool to find the
Access Point’s current IP address.
3. To find the unit’s current IP address if using DHCP, open the IP
Client Table in the DHCP Server and match the Access Point’s IP
address to its MAC address (found on the product label).
Alternatively, use ScanTool to identify an Access Point’s current IP
address.
4. Once you have the current IP address, use the HTTP or CLI
Interface to change the unit’s IP settings, if necessary.
5. If you use static IP Address assignments, and cannot access the
unit over Ethernet, use the Initializing the IP Address using CLI
procedure. Once the IP Address is set, you can use the Ethernet
Interface to complete configuration.
7-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
6. Perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure in this guide. This
will reset the unit to “DHCP” mode. If there is a DHCP Server on
the network, the DHCP Server will assign an IP Address to the AP.
HTTP (browser) or Telnet Interface Does Not Work
1. Make sure you are using a compatible browser:
— Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
— Netscape 6.1 or later
2. Make sure you have the proper IP address. Enter your
Access Point’s IP Address in the browser address bar, similar to
this example:
http://192.168.1.100
When the Enter Network Password window appears, leave the
User Name field empty and enter the HTTP password in the
Password field. The default HTTP password is “public”.
3. Use the CLI over the serial port to check the IP Access Table,
which can be restricting access to Telnet and HTTP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-7
Symptoms and Solutions
HTML Help Files Do Not Appear
1. Verify that the HTML Help files are installed in the default directory:
C:\Program Files\Avaya_Wireless\AP\HTML\
2. If the Help files are not located in this folder, contact your network
administrator to find out where the Help files are located on your
server.
3. Perform the following steps to verify the location or to enter the
pathname for the Help files:
a. Click the Commands button in the HTTP interface.
b. Select the Help tab located at the top of the screen.
c. Enter the pathname where the Help files are located in the
Help Link box.
d. Click OK when finished.
Telnet CLI Does Not Work
1. Make sure you have the proper IP Address. Enter your AP IP
address in the Telnet connection dialog, from a DOS prompt, type:
C:\> telnet <AP IP Address>
2. Confirm that your computer has an IP address in the same IP
subnet as your Access Point.
3. Use the CLI over the serial port to check the IP Access Table,
which can be restricting access to Telnet and HTTP.
7-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
TFTP Server Does Not Work
1. Make sure the TFTP Server has been started.
2. Verify the IP address of the TFTP Server. The server may be local
or remote, so long as it has a valid IP address.
3. Configure the TFTP Server to “point” to the folder containing the
file to be downloaded (or to the folder in which the file is to be
uploaded).
4. Verify that you have entered the proper AP Image file name
(including the file extension) and directory path.
5. If you have a problem uploading a file, verify that the TFTP server
is configured to allow uploads (typically the default setting is to
allow only downloads).
Client Connection Problems
Client Software Finds No Connection
Make sure you have configured your client software with the proper
Network Name and Security settings. Network Names and WEP Keys are
typically allocated and maintained by your network administrator.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-9
Symptoms and Solutions
Client PC Card Does Not Work
1. Make sure you are using the latest PC Card driver software.
2. Download and install the latest Avaya Wireless client software
from http://www.avaya.com/support.
Intermittent Loss of Connection
1. Make sure you are within range of an active AP.
2. You can check the signal strength using the signal strength gauge
on your client software. If you have an 802.11b AP, you can also
use the Remote Link Test available in the Access Point’s HTTP
interface. See Link Test.
Client Does Not Receive an IP Address - Cannot Connect to Internet
1. If the AP is configured as a DHCP server, open the Web-browser
Interface and select the Configure button and then the Network
tab to make sure the proper DHCP settings are being used.
2. If you are not using the DHCP server feature on the AP, then make
sure that your local DHCP server is accessible from the
Access Point’s subnet.
7-10
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
3. From the client computer, use the “ping” network command to test
the connection with the AP. If the AP responds, but you still cannot
connect to the Internet, there may be a physical network
configuration problem (contact your network support staff).
4. If using Power over Ethernet, make sure you are not using a
crossover Ethernet cable between the AP and the hub.
VLAN Operation Issues
Verifying Proper Operation of the VLAN Feature
The correct VLAN configuration can be verified by “pinging” both wired
and wireless hosts from both sides of the AP device and the network
switch. Traffic can be “sniffed” on both the wired (Ethernet) and wireless
(WDS) backbones (if configured). Bridge frames generated by wireless
clients and viewed on one of the backbones should contain IEEE 802.1Q
compliant VLAN headers or tags. The VLAN ID in the headers should
correspond to one of the VLAN User IDs configured for the AP.
NOTE:
Sixteen VLAN/SSID pairs are available for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed. The AP-5
and AP-4 support only one VLAN/SSID pair.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-11
Symptoms and Solutions
VLAN Workgroups
The correct VLAN assignment can be verified by pinging the AP to ensure
connectivity, by pinging the switch to ensure VLAN properties, and by
pinging hosts past the switch to confirm the switch is functional.
Ultimately, traffic can be “sniffed” on the Ethernet or WDS interfaces (if
configured) using third-party packages. Most problems can be avoided by
ensuring that 802.1Q compliant VLAN tags containing the proper VLAN
ID have been inserted in the bridged frames. The VLAN ID in the header
should correspond to the user’s assigned network name.
What if network traffic is being directed to a nonexistent host?
• All sessions are disconnected, traffic is lost, and a manual override
is necessary
• Workaround: you can configure the switch to mimic the nonexistent
host
I have just configured the Management ID and now I can't manage
the AP?
• Check to ensure your password is correct. If your password is
incorrect or all inbound packets do NOT have the correct tag, then
a manual override is necessary.
! CAUTION:
The manual override process disconnects all users and resets all values
to factory defaults.
7-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Symptoms and Solutions
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
The AP Does Not Work
1. Verify that you are using a standard UTP Category 5 cable.
2. Try a different port on the same PoE hub (remember to move the
input port accordingly) – if it works, there is probably a faulty port or
bad RJ-45 port connection.
3. If possible, try to connect the AP to a different PoE hub.
4. Try using a different Ethernet cable – if it works, there is probably a
faulty connection over the long cable, or a bad RJ-45 connection.
5. Check power plug and hub.
6. If the Ethernet link goes down, check the cable, cable type, switch,
and hub.
There Is No Data Link
1. Verify that the indicator for the port is “on.”
2. Verify that the PoE hub is connected to the Ethernet network with a
good connection.
3. Verify that the Ethernet cable is Category 5 or better and is less
than 100 meters (approximately 325 feet) in length from the
Ethernet source to the AP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-13
Recovery Procedures
4. Try to connect a different device to the same port on the PoE hub –
if it works and a link is established, there is probably a faulty data
link in the AP.
5. Try to re-connect the AP to a different output port (remember to
move the input port accordingly) – if it works, there is probably a
faulty output or input port in the PoE hub or a bad RJ-45
connection.
“Overload” Indications
1. Verify that you are not using a cross-over cable between the PoE
output port and the AP.
2. Verify that there is no short over any of the twisted pair cables.
3. Move the device into a different output port – if it works, there is
probably a faulty port or bad RJ-45 connection.
Recovery Procedures
The most common installation problems relate to IP addressing. For
example, without the TFTP server IP Address, you will not be able to
download a new AP Image to the AP. IP Address management is
fundamental. We suggest you create a chart to document and validate
the IP addresses for your system.
7-14
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
If the password is lost or forgotten, you will need to reset the AP to default
values. The Reset to Factory Default Procedure resets configuration
settings, but does not change the current AP Image.
If the AP has a corrupted software image, follow the Forced Reload
Procedure to erase the current AP Image and download a new image.
Reset to Factory Default Procedure
Use this procedure to reset the network configuration values, including
the Access Point’s IP address and subnet mask. The current AP Image is
not deleted. Follow this procedure if you forget the Access Point’s
password:
1. Press and hold the RELOAD button for 10 seconds.
NOTE:
See RELOAD and RESET Buttons to identify the buttons. You need
to use a pin or the end of a paperclip to press a button.
Result: The AP reboots, and the factory default network values are
restored.
2. If not using DHCP, use the ScanTool or CLI over a serial
connection to set the IP address, subnet mask, and other IP
parameters. See The Command Line Interface for CLI information.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-15
Recovery Procedures
Figure 7-1.
RELOAD and RESET Buttons
RESET
RELOAD
7-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
Forced Reload Procedure
Use this procedure to erase the current AP Image and download a new
AP Image. In some cases, specifically when a missing or corrupted AP
Image prevents successful booting, you may need to use ScanTool or the
Bootloader CLI to download a new executable AP Image.
NOTE:
This does not delete the AP’s configuration (in other words, the
Forced Reload Procedure does not reset to device to factory
defaults). If you need to force the AP to the factory default state after
loading a new AP image, use the Reset to Factory Default
Procedure above.
For this procedure, you will first erase the AP Image currently installed on
the unit and then use either ScanTool or the Bootloader CLI (over the
serial port) to set the IP address and download a new AP Image. Follow
these steps:
1. While the unit is running, press the RESET button.
NOTE:
See RELOAD and RESET Buttons to identify the buttons. You need
to use a pin or the end of a paperclip to press a button.
Result: The AP reboots and the indicators begin to flash.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-17
Recovery Procedures
! CAUTION:
By completing Step 2, the firmware in the AP will be erased. You will need
an Ethernet connection, a TFTP server, and a serial cable (if using the
Bootloader CLI) to reload firmware.
2. Press and hold the RELOAD button for about 20 seconds until the
POWER LED turns amber.
Result: The AP deletes the current AP Image.
3. Follow one of the procedures below to load a new AP Image to the
Access Point:
— Download a New Image Using ScanTool
— Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI
Download a New Image Using ScanTool
To download the AP Image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the
computer on which the TFTP server resides and to a computer that is
running ScanTool (this is either two separate computers connected to the
same network or a single computer running both programs).
ScanTool detects if an Access Point does not have a valid software
image installed. In this case, the TFTP Server and Image File Name
parameters are enabled in the ScanTool’s Change screen so you can
download a new image to the unit. (These fields are grayed out if
ScanTool does not detect a software image problem.)
7-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
Preparing to Download the AP Image
Before starting, you need to know the Access Point’s IP address, subnet
mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the AP Image file name. Make
sure the TFTP server is running and configured to point to the folder
containing the image to be downloaded.
Download Procedure
Follow these steps to use ScanTool to download a software image to an
Access Point with a missing image:
1. Download the latest software from http://www.avaya.com/support.
2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server.
3. Launch ScanTool.
4. Highlight the entry for the AP you want to update and click
Change.
5. Set IP Address Type to Static.
NOTE:
You need to assign static IP information temporarily to the
Access Point since its DHCP client functionality is not available
when no image is installed on the device.
6. Enter an unused IP address that is valid on your network in the IP
Address field. You may need to contact your network
administrator to get this address.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-19
Recovery Procedures
7. Enter the network’s Subnet Mask in the field provided.
8. Enter the network’s Gateway IP Address, if necessary. You may
need to contact your network administrator to get this address. You
should only need to enter the default gateway address if the
Access Point and the TFTP server are separated by a router.
9. Enter the IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided.
10. Enter the Image File Name (including the file extension). Enter the
full directory path and file name. If the file is located in the default
TFTP directory, you need enter only the file name.
11. Click OK.
— Result: The Access Point will reboot and the download will
begin automatically. You should see downloading activity
begin after a few seconds within the TFTP server’s status
screen.
12. Click OK when prompted that the device has been updated
successfully to return to the Scan List screen.
13. Click Cancel to close the ScanTool.
14. When the download process is complete, configure the AP as
described in Getting Started and Advanced Configuration.
7-20
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI
To download the AP Image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the
computer on which the TFTP server resides. This can be any computer
on the LAN or connected to the AP with a cross-over Ethernet cable.
You must also connect the AP to a computer with a standard serial cable
and use a terminal client, such as HyperTerminal. From the terminal,
enter CLI Commands to set the IP address and download an AP Image.
Preparing to Download the AP Image
Before starting, you need to know the Access Point’s IP address, subnet
mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the AP Image file name. Make
sure the TFTP server is running and configured to point to the folder
containing the image to be downloaded.
Download Procedure
1. Download the latest software from http://www.avaya.com/support.
2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server’s default
directory.
3. Use a straight-through serial cable to connect the Access Point’s
serial port to your computer’s serial port.
NOTE:
You must remove the Access Point’s cable cover and front cover to
access the serial port.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-21
Recovery Procedures
4. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and
set the following connection properties:
— Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
— Baud rate: 9600
— Data Bits: 8
— Stop bits: 1
— Flow Control: None
— Parity: None
5. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the
Send line ends with line feeds option.
Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line
of code.
6. Press the RESET button on the AP.
Result: The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST)
activity. After approximately 30 seconds, a message indicates:
Sending Traps to SNMP manager periodically. After this
message appears, press the ENTER key repeatedly until the
following prompt appears:
[Device-Name]>
7-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
7. Enter only the following statements:
[Device-Name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device-Name]> set ipaddr <Access Point IP Address>
[Device-Name]> set ipsubmask <IP Mask>
[Device-Name]> set tftpipaddr <TFTP Server IP Address>
[Device-Name]> set tftpfilename <AP Image File Name,
including file extension>
[Device-Name]> set ipgw <Gateway IP Address>
[Device-Name]> show ip (to confirm your new settings)
[Device-Name]> show tftp (to confirm your new settings)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Example:
[Device-Name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device-Name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12
[Device-Name]> set ipsubmask 255.255.255.0
[Device-Name]> set tftpipaddr 10.0.0.20
[Device-Name]> set tftpfilename MyImage.bin
[Device-Name]> set ipgw 10.0.0.30
[Device-Name]> show ip
[Device-Name]> show tftp
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Result: The AP will reboot and then download the image file. You
should see downloading activity begin after a few seconds within
the TFTP server’s status screen.
8. When the download process is complete, configure the AP as
described in Getting Started and Advanced Configuration.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-23
Recovery Procedures
Setting IP Address using Serial Port
Use the following procedure to set an IP address over the serial port
using the CLI. The network administrator typically provides the AP IP
address.
Hardware and Software Requirements
• Standard straight-through serial data (RS-232) cable with a one
male DB-9 connector and one female DB-9 connector. The AP
comes with a female 9-pin serial port.
• ASCII Terminal software, such as HyperTerminal.
Attaching the Serial Port Cable
1. Unlock and remove the cable cover from the AP.
2. Remove the front cover from the AP to reveal the serial port.
3. Connect one end of the serial cable to the AP and the other end to
a serial port on your computer.
4. Power on the computer and AP, if necessary.
7-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
Initializing the IP Address using CLI
After installing the serial port cable, you may use the CLI to communicate
with the AP. CLI supports most generic terminal emulation programs,
such as HyperTerminal (which is included with the Windows operating
systems). In addition, many web sites offer shareware or commercial
terminal programs you can download. Once the IP address has been
assigned, you can use the HTTP interface or the CLI over Telnet to
complete configuration.
Follow these steps to assign the AP an IP address:
1. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and
set the following connection properties:
— Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
— Baud rate: 9600
— Data Bits: 8
— Stop bits: 1
— Flow Control: None
— Parity: None
2. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the
Send line ends with line feeds option.
Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line
of code.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-25
Recovery Procedures
3. Press the RESET button on the AP (see RELOAD and RESET
Buttons to identify the location of the RESET button).
Result: The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST)
activity, and then displays a CLI prompt, similar to the example
below. This process may take up to 90 seconds.
[Device-Name]> Please enter password:
4. Enter the CLI password (default is public).
Result: The terminal displays a welcome message and then the
CLI Prompt:
[Device-Name]>
5. Enter show ip. Result: Network parameters appear:
Figure 7-2.
Result of “show ip” CLI Command
6. Change the IP address and other network values using set and
reboot CLI commands, similar to the example below (use your
own IP address and subnet mask). Note that IP Address Type is
set to Dynamic by default. If you have a DHCP server on your
7-26
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Recovery Procedures
network, you should not need to manually configure the
Access Point’s IP address; the Access Point will obtain an IP
address from the network’s DHCP server during boot-up.
Result: After each entry the CLI reminds you to reboot; however
wait to reboot until all commands have been entered.
[Device-Name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device-Name]> set ipaddr <IP Address>
[Device-Name]> set ipsubmask <IP Subnet Mask>
[Device-Name]> set ipgw <Default Gateway IP Address>
[Device-Name]> show ip (to confirm your new settings)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
7. After the AP reboots, verify the new IP address by reconnecting to
the CLI and enter a show ip command. Alternatively, you can ping
the AP from a network computer to confirm that the new IP
address has taken effect.
8. When the proper IP address is set, use the HTTP interface or CLI
over Telnet to configure the rest of the unit’s operating parameters.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-27
Related Applications
Related Applications
RADIUS Authentication Server
If you enabled RADIUS Authentication on the AP, make sure that your
network’s RADIUS servers are operational. Otherwise, clients will not be
able to log in. There are several reasons the authentication server
services might be unavailable, here are two typical things to check:
• Make sure you have the proper RADIUS authentication server
information setup configured in the AP. Check the RADIUS
Authentication Server’s Shared Secret and Destination Port number
(default is 1812; for RADIUS Accounting, the default is 1813).
• Make sure the RADIUS authentication server RAS setup matches
the AP.
TFTP Server
The “Trivial File Transfer Protocol” (TFTP) server allows you to transfer
files across a network. You can upload configuration files from the AP for
backup or copying, and you can download configuration files or new
software images. The TFTP software is located on the Avaya Wireless
AP Installation CD-ROM.
If a TFTP server is not configured and running, you will not be able to
download and upload images and configuration files to/from the AP.
Remember that the TFTP server does not have to be local, so long as you
7-28
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Related Applications
have a valid TFTP IP address. Note that you do not need a TFTP server
running unless you want to transfer files to or from the AP.
After the TFTP server is installed:
• Check to see that TFTP is configured to point to the directory
containing the AP Image.
• Make sure you have the proper TFTP server IP Address, the proper
AP Image file name, and that the TFTP server is connected.
• Make sure the TFTP server is configured to both send and
receive, with no time-out.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
7-29
Related Applications
7-30
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
The Command Line
Interface
A
In This Appendix
This section describes the AP’s Command Line (CLI) Interface. CLI
commands can be used to initialize, configure, and manage the Access
Point.
CLI commands may be entered in real time through a keyboard or
submitted with CLI scripts. After entering commands, press the Enter key
to execute the command.
The CLI is available through both the Serial Port interface and over the
Ethernet interface using Telnet.
NOTE:
All CLI commands and parameters are case-sensitive.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-1
In This Appendix
This appendix contains the following sections:
• General Notes
• Link Integrity Commands
• Bootloader CLI
• MAC Access Control Commands
• CLI Conventions
• Monitoring Parameters
• CLI Help
• Packet Forwarding Commands
• Accessing the AP CLI
• RAD Commands
• CLI Commands
• RADIUS Commands
• Parameter Tables
• Secure Management Commands
• Auto Configuration Commands
• Serial Port Commands
• DHCP Server Commands
• SNMP Commands
• DNS Client Commands
• Spanning Tree Commands
• Ethernet Interface Commands
• SpectraLink VoIP Commands
• Filtering Commands
• Storm Threshold Commands
• HTTP and HTTPS Commands
• Syslog Commands
• IAPP Commands
• System Information Commands
• Intra BSS Commands
• Telnet Commands
• Inventory Management Commands • TFTP Commands
• IP Access Table Commands
• WDS Commands
• IP Commands
• 802.11a Wireless Interface
Commands
A-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
General Notes
• 802.11b Wireless Interface
Commands
• Wireless Interface
SSID/VLAN/Security Commands
• 802.11b/g Wireless Interface
Commands
• VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
General Notes
Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge
To use this document effectively, you should have a working knowledge of
Local Area Networking (LAN) concepts, network access infrastructures,
and client-server relationships. In addition, you should be familiar with
software setup procedures for typical network operating systems and
servers.
Notation Conventions
• Computer prompts are shown as constant width type. For example:
[Device-Name]>
• Information that you input as shown is displayed in bold constant
width type. For example: [Device-Name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12
• The names of keyboard keys, software buttons, and field names are
displayed in bold type. For example: Click the Configure button.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-3
General Notes
• Screen names are displayed in bold italics. For example, the
System Status screen.
Important Terminology
Term
Description
Configuration Files
Database files containing the current
Access Point configuration.
Configuration items include the IP
Address and other network-specific
values. Config files may be downloaded
to the Access Point or uploaded for
backup or troubleshooting.
Download vs. Upload
Downloads transfer files to the Access
Point. Uploads transfer files from the
Access Point. The TFTP server
performs file transfers in both directions.
Group
A logical collection of network
parameter information. For example, the
System Group is composed of several
related parameters.
Groups can also
contain Tables.
All items for a given Group can be
displayed with a show <Group> CLI
Command.
1 of 2
A-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
General Notes
Term
Description
Image File
The Access Point software executed
from RAM. To update an Access Point
you typically download a new Image
File. This file is often referred to as the
“AP Image”.
Parameter
A fundamental network value that can
be displayed and may be changeable.
For example, the Access Point must
have a unique IP Address and the
Wireless interface must be assigned an
SSID. Change parameters with the CLI
set Command, and view them with the
CLI show Command.
Table
Tables hold parameters for several
related items. For example, you can add
several potential managers to the SNMP
Table. All items for a given Table can be
displayed with a show <Table> CLI
Command.
TFTP
Refers to the TFTP Server, used for file
transfers.
2 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-5
General Notes
Navigation and Special Keys
This CLI supports the following navigation and special key functions to
move the cursor along the prompt line.
Key Combination
Operation
Delete or Backspace
Delete previous character
Ctrl-A
Move cursor to beginning of line
Ctrl-E
Move cursor to end of line
Ctrl-F
Move cursor forward one character
Ctrl-B
Move cursor back one character
Ctrl-D
Delete the character the cursor is on
Ctrl-U
Delete all text to left of cursor
Ctrl-P
Go to the previous line in the history buffer
Ctrl-N
Go to the next line in the history buffer
Tab
Complete the command line
?
List available commands
A-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
General Notes
CLI Error Messages
The following table describes the error messages associated with
improper inputs or expected CLI behavior.
Error Message
Description
Syntax Error
Invalid syntax entered at the command
prompt.
Invalid Command
A non-existent command has been entered
at the command prompt.
Invalid Parameter
Name
An invalid parameter name has been entered
at the command prompt.
Invalid Parameter
Value
An invalid parameter value has been entered
at the command prompt.
Invalid Table Index
An invalid table index has been entered at
the command prompt.
Invalid Table
Parameter
An invalid table parameter has been entered
at the command prompt.
Invalid Table
Parameter Value
An invalid table parameter value has been
entered at the command prompt.
Read Only Parameter
User is attempting to configure a read-only
parameter.
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-7
Bootloader CLI
Error Message
Description
Incorrect Password
An incorrect password has been entered in
the CLI login prompt.
Download
Unsuccessful
The download operation has failed due to
incorrect TFTP server IP Address or file
name.
Upload Unsuccessful
The upload operation has failed due to
incorrect TFTP server IP Address or file
name.
2 of 2
Bootloader CLI
Administrators use the CLI to control Access Point operation and monitor
network statistics. The AP supports two types of CLI: the Bootloader CLI
and the normal CLI. The Bootloader CLI provides a limited command set,
and is used to perform initial configuration of the AP when the current AP
image is bad or missing. The Bootloader CLI allows you to assign an IP
Address and download a new image. Once the image is downloaded and
running, the Access Point uses the normal CLI. This guide covers the
normal CLI unless otherwise specified.
The Bootloader CLI is accessible via the serial interface only if the AP
does not contain a software image or a download image command over
TFTP has failed.
A-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Bootloader CLI
The Bootloader CLI provides you with the ability to configure the initial
setup parameters as well as download a software image to the device.
The following functions are supported by the Bootloader CLI:
• set command to configure the device’s initial parameters
• show command to view the device’s configuration parameters
• help command to provide additional information on all commands
supported by the Bootloader CLI
• reboot command to reboot the device
The parameters supported by the Bootloader CLI (for viewing and
modifying) are:
• System Name
• IP Address Assignment Type
• IP Address
• IP Mask
• Gateway IP Address
• TFTP Server IP Address
• Image File Name (including the file extension)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-9
Bootloader CLI
The following lists display the results of using the help command in the
Bootloader CLI:
Figure A-1.
A-10
Results of “help” bootloader CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Conventions
The following lists display the results of using the show command in the
Bootloader CLI:
Figure A-2.
Results of “show” bootloader CLI command
CLI Conventions
This section contains the following topics:
• Command Conventions
• Entering Text Strings
Command Conventions
Each table element (or parameter) must be specified, as in the example
below.
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 ipmask
255.255.0.0
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-11
CLI Conventions
Below are the rules for creating, modifying, enabling and disabling, and
deleting table entries.
• Creation
— The table name is required.
— The table index is required. For table entry or instance
creation, the index is always zero (0).
— The order in which the table arguments or objects are entered
is not important.
— Parameters that are not required can be omitted, in which
case they will be assigned the default value.
• Modification
— The table name is required.
— The table index is required. To modify the table, “index” must
be the index of the entry to be modified.
— Only the table objects that are to be modified need to be
specified. Not all the table objects are required.
— If multiple table objects are to be modified, the order in which
they are entered is not important.
— If the entire table entry is to be modified, all the table objects
have to be specified.
A-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Conventions
• Enabling/Disabling
— The table name is required.
— The table index is required. For table enabling/disabling the
index should be the index of the entry to be enabled/disabled.
— The entry’s new state (either “enable” or “disable”) is required.
• Deletion
— The table name is required.
— The table index is required. For table deletion the index should
be the index of the entry to be deleted.
— The word “delete” is required.
Entering Text Strings
When you enter a text string that contains spaces for a parameter, you
must use a string delimiter for the AP to correctly interpret the text string.
For this CLI implementation, the single quote or double quote character
can be used at the beginning and at the end of the string.
For example:
[Device-Name]> set sysname Lobby — Does not need quote marks
[Device-Name]> set sysname “Front Lobby” — Requires quote marks.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-13
CLI Help
The scenarios supported by this CLI are:
“My Desk in the office”
‘My Desk in the office’
“My ‘Desk’ in the office”
‘My “Desk” in the office’
“Daniel’s Desk in the office”
‘Daniel”s Desk in the office’
Double Quotes
Single Quotes
Single Quotes within Double Quotes
Double Quotes within Single Quotes
One Single Quote within Double Quotes
One Double Quote within Single Quotes
The string delimiter does not have to be used for every string object. You
must use the single quote or double quote only for text strings that contain
blank spaces. If the text string does not contain blank spaces, then the
string delimiters, single or double quotes, mentioned in this section are
not required.
CLI Help
This section contains the following topics:
• The Question Mark
• The Help Command
The Question Mark
This command can be used in a number of ways to display available
commands and parameters.
A-14
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Help
The following table lists each operation and provides a basic example.
Detailed examples and display results for each operation follow the table.
Operation
Basic Example
Display the command list (see Example
1. Displaying the command list)
[Device-Name]>?
Display commands that start with
specified letters (see Example 2.
Displaying specific commands)
[Device-Name]>s?
Display parameters for set and show
commands (see Example 3. Displaying
parameters for set and show
commands)
[Device-Name]> set ?
Prompt to enter successive parameters
for commands (see Example 4.
Displaying prompts for successive
parameters)
[Device-Name]> download
?
[Device-Name]> show
ipa?
Example 1. Displaying the command list
To display the command list, enter ?.
[Device-Name]>?
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-15
CLI Help
Figure A-3.
Result of “?” CLI command
Example 2. Displaying specific commands
To show all commands that start with specified letters, enter one or more
letters, then ? with no space between letters and ?.
[Device-Name]>s?
Figure A-4.
Result of “s?” CLI command
Example 3. Displaying parameters for set and show commands
Example 3a allows you to see every possible parameter for the set (or
show) commands. Notice from example 3a that the list is very long.
Example 3b shows how to display a subset of the parameters based on
initial parameter letters.
A-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Help
Example 3a. Displaying every parameter that can be changed
[Device-Name]> set ?
Figure A-5.
Result of “set ?” CLI command
.
.
.
.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-17
CLI Help
Example 3b. Displaying parameters based on letter sequence
This example shows entries for parameters that start with the letter “i”.
The more letters you enter, the fewer the results returned. Notice that
there is no space between the letters and the question mark.
[Device-Name]> show ipa?
Figure A-6.
Result of “show ipa?” CLI command
[Device-Name]> show iparp?
Figure A-7.
Result of “show iparp?” CLI command
Example 4. Displaying prompts for successive parameters
Enter the command, a space, and then ?. Then, when the parameter
prompt appears, enter the parameter value. Result: The parameter is
changed and a new CLI line is echoed with the new value (in the first part
of the following example, the value is the IP Address of the TFTP server).
A-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Help
After entering one parameter, you may add another ? to the new CLI line
to see the next parameter prompt, and so on until you have entered all of
the required parameters. The following example shows how this is used
for the download Command. The last part of the example shows the
completed download command ready for execution.
[Device-Name]> download ?
<TFTP IP Address>
[Device-Name]> download 192.168.0.101 ?
<File Name>
[Device-Name]> download 192.168.0.101 apimage ?
<file type (config/img/bootloader)>
[Device-Name]> download 192.168.0.101 apimage img <CR>
The Help Command
The help command displays instructions on using control-key sequences
for navigating a command line and displays command information and
examples.
• Using help as the only argument:
[Device-Name]> help
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-19
CLI Help
Figure A-8.
Results of “help” CLI command
• Complete command description and command usage can be
provided by:
[Device-Name]> help <command name>
[Device-Name]> <command name> help
A-20
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Accessing the AP CLI
Accessing the AP CLI
You can use HyperTerminal or Telnet to access the AP CLI:
• Using HyperTerminal to Log in to the AP
• Using Telnet to Log in to the AP
Using HyperTerminal to Log in to the AP
1. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and
set the following connection properties:
— Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
— Baud rate: 9600
— Data Bits: 8
— Stop bits: 1
— Flow Control: None
— Parity: None
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-21
Accessing the AP CLI
2. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the
Send line ends with line feeds option.
Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line
of code.
3. Enter the CLI password (default is public).
NOTE:
Avaya recommends changing all default passwords immediately.
See the following sections for information on how to change the
default passwords:
— CLI password, see passwd.
— SNMP passwords (read, read-write, and SNMPv3
authentication and privacy), see SNMP Commands.
— HTTP password, see HTTP and HTTPS Commands.
Using Telnet to Log in to the AP
The CLI commands can be used to access, configure, and manage the
AP using Telnet. Follow these steps:
1. Confirm that your computer’s IP address is in the same IP subnet
as the AP.
A-22
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Accessing the AP CLI
NOTE:
If you have not previously configured the Access Point’s IP address
and do not have a DHCP server on the network, the Access Point
will default to an IP address of 169.254.128.132.
2. Go to the DOS command prompt on your computer.
3. Type telnet <IP Address of the unit>.
4. Enter the CLI password (default is public).
NOTE:
Avaya recommends changing all default passwords immediately.
See the following sections for information on how to change the
default passwords:
— CLI password, see passwd.
— SNMP passwords (read, read-write, and SNMPv3
authentication and privacy), see SNMP Commands.
— HTTP password, see HTTP and HTTPS Commands.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-23
CLI Commands
CLI Commands
• done: Terminates the CLI session
• download: Uses TFTP server to download image, configuration, or
bootloader upgrade files to Access Point
• exit: Terminates the CLI session
• help: Displays general CLI help information or command help
information, such as command usage and syntax
• history: Remembers commands to help avoid re-entering complex
statements
• passwd: Sets the Access Point’s CLI password
• quit: Terminates the CLI session
• reboot: Reboots the Access Point in the specified time
• search: Lists the parameters in a specified Table
• set: Configures the value of the specified parameter.
• show: Displays the value of the specified parameter, or displays all
parameter values of a specified group (parameter table).
• upload: Uses TFTP server to upload configuration files from Access
Point to TFTP default directory or specified path
A-24
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
done
Ends a CLI session.
[Device-Name]> done
The exit and quit commands perform the same action.
download
Downloads the specified file from a TFTP server to the Access Point.
Executing download in combination with the asterisk character (*) will
make use of the previously set TFTP parameters. Executing download
without parameters will display command help and usage information.
Syntax:
Action
Downloads a file
Syntax
[Device-Name]> download <tftp
server address> <path and
filename> <file type>
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-25
CLI Commands
Action
Displays help and usage
information
Executes the download
command using previously set
(stored) TFTP parameters
Syntax
[Device-Name]> download
[Device-Name]> download *
2 of 2
Example:
[Device-Name]> download 192.168.1.100 APImage2 img
exit
Ends a CLI session:
[Device-Name]> exit
The done and quit commands perform the same action.
help
Displays instructions on using control-key sequences for navigating a
command line and displays command information and examples.
A-26
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
Syntax:
Action
Syntax
Use help as the only argument.
See the following example.
[Device-Name]> help
Display complete command
description and command usage
[Device-Name]> help <command
name>
[Device-Name]> <command name>
help
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-27
CLI Commands
Example:
Figure A-9.
A-28
Results of “help” CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
history
Shows contents of Command History Buffer. The Command History
Buffer stores command statements entered in the current session. To
avoid re-entering long command statements, use the keyboard Up Arrow
(Ctrl-P) and Down Arrow (Ctrl-N) keys to recall previous statements from
the Command History Buffer. When the desired statement is displayed,
press the Enter key to execute, or you may edit the statement before
executing it.
[Device-Name]> history
passwd
Changes the CLI Password.
[Device-Name]> passwd <oldpassword> <newpassword> <newpassword>
! CAUTION:
Avaya strongly urges you to change the default passwords to restrict
access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform the Reset to Factory
Default Procedure.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-29
CLI Commands
quit
Ends a CLI session:
[Device-Name]> quit
The done and exit commands perform the same action.
reboot
Reboots the Access Point after specified number of seconds. Specify a
value of 0 (zero) for immediate reboot.
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
[Device-Name]> reboot 30
A-30
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
search
Lists the parameters supported by the specified table. This list
corresponds to the table information displayed in the HTTP interface. In
the following example, the CLI returns the list of parameters that make up
an entry in the IP Access Table.
Example:
[Device-Name]> search mgmtipaccesstbl
Figure A-10.
Results of “search mgmtipaccesstbl” CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-31
CLI Commands
set
Configures the value of the specified parameter. To see a definition and
syntax example, type only set and then press the Enter key. To see a list
of available parameters, enter a space, then a question mark (?) after set
(example: set?).
As shown in the following examples, parameters may be set individually
or all parameters for a given table can be set with a single statement.
Syntax
[Device-Name]> set <parameter> <value>
[Device-Name]> set <table> <index> <argument 1> <value 1> ...
<argument N> <value N>
Configuring Objects that Require Reboot
Certain objects supported by the Access Point require a device reboot for
the changes to take effect. To inform you of this behavior, the CLI
provides informational messages when you have configured an object
that requires a reboot. The following messages are displayed as a result
of the configuring such object or objects.
A-32
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
The following message is displayed every time you configure an object
that requires the device to be rebooted.
[Device-Name]> set ipaddr 135.114.73.10
The following elements require reboot
ipaddr
In addition to the above informational message, the CLI also provides a
message as a result of the exit, quit, or done command if changes have
been made to objects that require reboot. If you make changes to objects
that require reboot and execute the exit command the following message
is displayed:
[Device-Name]> exit<CR> OR quit<CR> OR done<CR>
Modifications have been made to parameters that require the
device to be rebooted. These changes will only take effect after
the next reboot.
Examples
[Device-Name]> set sysloc “Main Lobby”
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 ipmask
255.255.0.0
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-33
CLI Commands
Set the Access Point IP Address Parameter
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> set <parameter name> <parameter
value>
Example: [Device-Name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12
Result:
IP Address will be changed when you reboot the
Access Point. The CLI reminds you when rebooting is
required for a change to take effect. To reboot
immediately, enter reboot 0 (zero) at the CLI prompt.
Create a table entry or row
Use 0 (zero) as the table index when you create an entry. When creating
a table row, only the mandatory table elements are required (comment is
usually an optional table element). For optional table elements, the
default value is generally applied if you do not specify a value.
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> set <table name> <table index>
<element 1> <value 1> … <element n> <value n>
Example: [Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr
10.0.0.10 ipmask 255.255.0.0
Result:
A-34
A new table entry is created for IP address 10.0.0.10
with a 255.255.0.0 subnet mask.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
Modify a table entry or row
Use the index to be modified and the table elements you would like to
modify. For example, suppose the IP Access Table has one entry and you
wanted to modify the IP address:
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.11
You can also modify several elements in the table entry. Enter the index
number and specific table elements you would like to modify. (Hint: Use
the search command to see the elements that belong to the table.)
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.12 ipmask
255.255.255.248 cmt “First Row”
Enable, Disable, or Delete a table entry or row
The following example shows how to manage the second entry in a table.
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> set <Table> index status <enable,
disable, delete>
[Device-Name]> set <Table> index status <1=enable,
2=disable, 3=delete>
Example: [Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status enable
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status disable
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status delete
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-35
CLI Commands
NOTE:
You may need to enable a disabled table entry before you can
change the entry’s elements.
show
Displays the value of the specified parameter, or displays all parameter
values of a specified group (parameter table). Groups contain Parameters
and Tables. Tables contain parameters for a series of similar entities.
To see a definition and syntax example, type only show and then press
the Enter key. To see a list of available parameters, enter a question mark
(?) after show (example: show ?).
Syntax
[Device-Name]> show <parameter>
[Device-Name]> show <group>
[Device-Name]> show <table>
Examples
[Device-Name]> show ipaddr
[Device-Name]> show network
[Device-Name]> show mgmtipaccesstbl
A-36
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
Show Group Parameters
To view all elements of a group or table:
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> show <group name>
Example:
[Device-Name]> show network
Result:
The CLI displays network group parameters. Note
show network and show ip return the same data.
Figure A-11.
Commands
Results of “show network” and “show ip” CLI
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-37
CLI Commands
Show Individual and Table Parameters
To view a single parameter:
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> show <parameter name>
Example: [Device-Name]> show ipaddr
Result:
Figure A-12.
Displays the Access Point IP address.
Result of “show ipaddr” CLI Command
To view all parameters in a table:
A-38
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> show <table name>
Example:
[Device-Name]> show mgmtipaccesstbl
Result:
Displays the IP Access Table and its entries.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
CLI Commands
upload
Uploads a text-based configuration file from the AP to the TFTP Server.
Executing upload with the asterisk character (*) will make use of the
previously set/stored TFTP parameters. Executing upload without
parameters will display command help and usage information.
Syntax:
Action
Syntax
Upload a file:
[Device-Name]> upload <tftp
server address> <path and
filename> <filetype>
Display help and usage
information:
[Device-Name]> help upload
Execute the upload command
using previously set (stored)
TFTP Parameters:
[Device-Name]> upload *
Example:
[Device-Name]> upload 192.168.1.100 APconfig.sys config
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-39
Parameter Tables
Parameter Tables
Objects contain groups that contain both parameters and parameter
tables. Use the parameter tables in the following sections to configure the
Access Point. Columns used in the tables include:
• Name - Parameter, Group, or Table Name
• Type - Data type
• Values - Value range, and default value, if any
• Access = access type, R = Read Only (show), RW = Read-Write
(can be “set”), W = Write Only
• CLI Parameter - Parameter name as used in the Access Point
Access Point network objects are associated with Groups. The network
objects and their associated parameters are described in the following
sections.
A-40
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Auto Configuration Commands
Auto Configuration Commands
The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures an AP by
downloading a specific configuration file from a TFTP server during the
boot up process.
Perform the following commands to enable and set up automatic
configuration:
NOTE:
The configuration filename and TFTP server IP address are
configured only when the AP is configured for Static IP. If the AP is
configured for Dynamic IP, these parameters are not used and
obtained from DHCP.
The default filename is config. The default TFTP IP address is
169.254.128.133 for the AP.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-41
Auto Configuration Commands
Auto Configuration Parameters
These parameters relate to the Auto Configuration feature which allows
an AP to be automatically configured by downloading a specific
configuration file from a TFTP server during the boot up process.
Name
Type
Values
Auto
Group
N/A
Configuration
Integer
enable (default)
Auto
disable
Configuration
Status
Auto Config
DisplayString User Defined
File Name
IpAddress
User Defined
Auto Config
TFTP Server IP
Address
Access
R
CLI Parameter
autoconfig
RW
autoconfigstatus
RW
autoconfigfilename
RW
autoconfigTFTPaddr
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set autoconfigstatus <enable/disable>
[Device-Name]> set autoconfigfilename <filename>
Enter the filename of the configuration file that is used if the
AP is configured for Static IP.
[Device-Name]> set autoconfigTFTPaddr <IP address>
Enter the TFTP server address that is used if the AP is
configured for Static IP.
A-42
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
DHCP Server Commands
DHCP Server Commands
! CAUTION:
Before enabling DHCP server on the AP, confirm that the IP address
pools you have configured are valid addresses on the network and do not
overlap the addresses assigned by any other DHCP server on the network. Enabling this feature with incorrect address pools will cause problems on your network.
DHCP Server Parameters
Name
DHCP Server
DHCP Server
Status
Gateway IP
Address
Primary DNS IP
Address
Secondary DNS IP
Address
Number of IP Pool
Table Entries
Type
Group
Integer
IpAddress
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
dhcp
RW
dhcpstatus
enable (1) (default)
disable (2)
delete (3)
User Defined
RW
dhcpgw
IpAddress
User Defined
RW
dhcppridnsipaddr
IpAddress
User Defined
RW
dhcpsecdnsipaddr
Integer32
N/A
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
R
dhcpippooltblent
A-43
DHCP Server Commands
NOTE:
You must have at least one entry in the DHCP Server IP Address
Pool Table before you can set the DHCP Server Status (dhcpstatus)
to Enable.
IP Address Pool Parameters
Name
Type
DHCP Server IP
Table
Address Pool Table
Table Index
Integer
Start IP Address
IpAddress
End IP Address
IpAddress
Width
Integer
Default Lease Time Integer32
(optional)
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
dhcpippooltbl
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
3600–
N/A
RW
RW
RW
RW
index
startipaddr
endipaddr
width
defleasetm
RW
maxleasetm
RW
RW
cmt
status
Maximum Lease
Time (optional)
Integer32
86400 sec
(default)
3600–
Comment (optional)
Status (optional)
DisplayString
Integer
86400 sec
(default)
User Defined
enable (1)
disable (2)
delete (3)
A-44
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
DHCP Server Commands
NOTE:
Set either End IP Address or Width (but not both) when creating an
IP address pool.
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set dhcpstatus disable
[Device-Name]> set dhcpippooltbl 0 startipaddr <start ip
address> endipaddr <end ip address>
[Device-Name]> set dhcpgw <gateway ip address>
[Device-Name]> set dhcppridnsipaddr <primary dns ip address>
[Device-Name]> set dhcpsecdnsipaddr <secondary dns ip address>
[Device-Name]> set dhcpstatus enable
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-45
DNS Client Commands
DNS Client Commands
DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution
Name
DNS Client
DNS Client status
Type
Group
Integer
Primary DNS
Server IP Address
Secondary DNS
Server IP Address
Default Domain
Name
Values
N/A
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
dns
RW
dnsstatus
IpAddress
disable (default)
User Defined
RW
dnspridnsipaddr
IpAddress
User Defined
RW
dnssecdnsipaddr
Integer32
User Defined (up to
254 characters)
RW
dnsdomainname
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set dnsstatus enable
[Device-Name]> set dnsprisvripaddr <IP address of primary DNS
server>
[Device-Name]> set dnssecsvripaddr <IP address of secondary DNS
server>
[Device-Name]> set dnsdomainname <default domain name>
A-46
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
DNS Client Commands
[Device-Name]> show dns
Figure A-13.
Results of “show dns” CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-47
Ethernet Interface Commands
Ethernet Interface Commands
Ethernet Interface Parameters
Name
Ethernet Interface
Speed
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
10halfduplex
Access CLI Parameter
R
ethernet
RW
etherspeed
10fullduplex
10autoduplex
100halfduplex
100fullduplex
autohalfduplex
MAC Address
PhyAddress
autoautoduplex
(default)
N/A
R
ethermacaddr
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set etherspeed <value> (See Table A-1.)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
A-48
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Ethernet Interface Commands
Table A-1
Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode
Ethernet Speed and Transmission
Mode
Value
10 Mbits/sec - half duplex
10halfduplex
10 Mbits/sec - full duplex
10fullduplex
10 Mbits/sec - auto duplex
10autoduplex
100 Mbits/sec - half duplex
100halfduplex
100 Mbits/sec - full duplex
100fullduplex
Auto Speed - half duplex
autohalfduplex
Auto Speed - auto duplex
autoautoduplex (default)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-49
Filtering Commands
Filtering Commands
Ethernet Protocol Filtering Parameters
Name
Type
Ethernet Filtering Group
Filtering Interface Interface
Bitmask
Bitmask
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
etherflt
0 or 2 - no interfaces
RW
etherfltifbitmask
(disable)
1 or 3 - Ethernet
4 or 6 - Wireless
5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7)
passthru
Operation Type
RW
etherfltoptype
block
Ethernet Protocol Filtering Table Parameters
Identify the different filters by using the table index.
Name
Ethernet Protocol
Filtering Table
Table Index
Protocol Number
Type
Table
N/A
Octet String
Values
N/A
N/A
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
etherflttbl
R
RW
index
protonumber
1 of 2
A-50
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering Commands
Name
Protocol Name
(optional)
Status (optional)
Type
DisplayString
Integer
Values
enable (1)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
protoname
RW
status
disable (2)
delete (3)
2 of 2
NOTE:
The filter Operation Type (passthru or block) applies only to the
protocol filters that are enabled in this table.
NOTE:
The AP requires a reboot for changes to the Ethernet Protocol
Filtering Table to take effect.
Static MAC Address Filter Table
Name
Static MAC
Address Filter
Table
Table Index
Static MAC
Address on Wired
Network
Type
Table
N/A
PhysAddress
Values
N/A
N/A
User Defined
Access CLI Parameter
R
staticmactbl
R
RW
index
wiredmacaddr
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-51
Filtering Commands
Name
Static MAC
Address Mask on
Wired Network
Static MAC
Address on
Wireless Network
Static MAC
Address Mask on
Wireless Network
Comment
(optional)
Status (optional)
Type
PhysAddress
Values
User Defined
PhysAddress
User Defined
RW
wirelessmacaddr
PhysAddress
User Defined
RW
wirelessmask
DisplayString
max 255
characters
enable (default)
RW
cmt
RW
status
Integer
Access CLI Parameter
RW
wiredmask
disable
delete
2 of 2
Proxy ARP Parameters
Name
Proxy ARP
Status
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
parp
RW
parpstatus
disable (default)
A-52
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering Commands
IP ARP Filtering Parameters
Name
IP ARP Filtering
Status
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Type
Group
Integer
IpAddress
IpAddress
Values
N/A
enable
disable (default)
User Defined
User Defined
Access CLI Parameter
R
iparp
RW
iparpfltstatus
RW
RW
iparpfltipaddr
iparpfltsubmask
Broadcast Filtering Table
Name
Type
Broadcast Filtering Table
Table
Index
Integer
Protocol Name
Direction
DisplayString
Integer
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
broadcastflttbl
1-5
N/A
index
N/A
ethertowireless
R
RW
protoname
direction
RW
status
wirelesstoether
Status
Integer
both (default)
enable
disable (default)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-53
Filtering Commands
TCP/UDP Port Filtering
The following parameters are used to enable/disable the Port filter
feature.
Name
Port Filtering
Port Filter Status
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
enable (default)
Access CLI Parameter
R
portflt
RW
portfltstatus
disable
TCP/UDP Port Filtering Table
The following parameters are used to configure TCP/UDP Port filters.
Name
Type
Port Filtering Table Table
Table Index
N/A
Values
N/A
User Defined
Access CLI Parameter
R
portflttbl
R
index
(there are also 4
pre-defined
indices, see Port
Number in this
table for more
information)
1 of 3
A-54
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Filtering Commands
Name
Port Type
Type
Octet String
Values
tcp
Access CLI Parameter
RW
porttype
udp
Port Number
Octet String
tcp/udp
User Defined
RW
portnum
RW
protoname
(there are also 4
pre-defined
protocols:
Protocol Name
DisplayString
Index 1: NetBios
Name Service –
137, Index 2:
NetBios Datagram
Service – 138,
Index 3: NetBios
Session Service –
139, Index 4:
SNMP Service –
161)
User Defined
(there are also 4
pre-defined
protocols, see Port
Number above)
2 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-55
Filtering Commands
Name
Interface Bitmask
Type
Integer32
Values
Access CLI Parameter
RW
ifbitmask
0 or 2 - no
interfaces (disable)
1 or 3 - Ethernet
4 or 6 - Wireless
Status (optional)
Integer
5 or 7 - all
interfaces (default
is 7)
enable (default for
new entries)
RW
status
disable (default for
pre-defined
entries)
delete
3 of 3
A-56
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
HTTP and HTTPS Commands
HTTP and HTTPS Commands
HTTP (Web browser) Parameters
! CAUTION:
Avaya strongly urges you to change the default passwords to restrict
access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform the Reset to Factory
Default Procedure.
Name
HTTP
HTTP
Management
Interface Bitmask
Type
Group
Interface
Bitmask
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
http
RW
httpifbitmask
0 or 2 - no
interfaces (disable)
1 or 3 - Ethernet
4 or 6 - Wireless
HTTP Password
DisplayString
HTTP Port
Integer
5 or 7 - all
interfaces (default
is 7)
User Defined
max 64 characters
User Defined
Help Link
SSL Status
SSL Certificate
Passphrase
DisplayString
Integer
DisplayString
Default = 80
User Defined
Enable/Disable
User Defined
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
W
httppasswd
RW
httpport
RW
RW
Write-o
nly
httphelplink
sslstatus
sslpassphrase
A-57
HTTP and HTTPS Commands
NOTE:
The default path for the Help files is C:/Program Files/Avaya_
Wireless/AP/HTML/index.htm. (Use the forward slash character (/)
rather than the back slash character (\) when configuring the Help
Link location.) The AP Help information is available in English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese.
Syntax Examples
Change HTTP Interface Password
[Device-Name]> set httppasswd <New Password> (HTTP interface
password)
Configure Management Interfaces
[Device-Name]> set httpifbitmask <(see Table A-2)>
Choose from the following values:
Table A-2
Interface Bitmask Values
Interface Bitmask
Description
0 or 2 = disable (all interfaces)
All management channels disabled
1 or 3 = Ethernet only
Ethernet only enabled
4 or 6 = Wireless only
Wireless only enabled
5 or 7 = all interfaces
All management channels enabled
A-58
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
HTTP and HTTPS Commands
Set TCP Port
[Device-Name]> set httpport <HTTP port number (default is 80)>
Configure Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS)
Enabling SSL and configuring a passphrase allows encrypted Secure
Socket Layer communications to the AP through the HTTPS interface.
[Device-Name]> set sslstatus <enable/disable>
You must change the SSL passphrase when uploading a new
certificate/private key pair, which will have a corresponding passphrase.
[Device-Name]> set sslpassphrase <SSL certificate passphrase>
[Device-Name]> show http
To view all HTTP configuration information including SSL.
HTTP Group Parameters
=====================
httpifbitmask
:
15
httppasswd
:
********
httpport
:
80
httphelplink
:
file:///C:/Program
Files/ORiNOCO/AP2000/HTML/home.htm
httpsetupwiz
:
disable
sslstatus
:
enable
sslpassphrase
:
********
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-59
IAPP Commands
IAPP Commands
NOTE:
These parameters configure the Inter Access Point Protocol (IAPP)
for roaming. Leave these settings at their default value unless a
technical representative asks you to change them.
IAPP Parameters
Name
IAPP
IAPP Status
Periodic Announce
Interval (seconds)
Type
Group
Integer
Integer
Values
N/A
enable (default)
disable
80
Access CLI Parameter
R
iapp
RW
iappstatus
RW
iappannint
120 (default)
160
Announce
Integer
Response Time
Handover Time-out Integer
200
2 seconds
410 ms
512 ms (default)
614 ms
717 ms
819 ms
R
iappannresp
RW
iapphandtout
1 of 2
A-60
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Intra BSS Commands
Name
Type
Max. Handover
Integer
Retransmissions
Send Announce
Integer
Request on Startup
Values
1 - 4 (default 4)
enable (default)
disable
Access CLI Parameter
RW
iapphandretx
RW
iappannreqstart
2 of 2
Intra BSS Commands
Intra BSS Parameters
The following parameters control the Intra Basic Service Set (BSS) traffic
feature, which prevents wireless clients that are associated with the same
AP from communicating with each other.
Name
Intra BSS Traffic
Intra BSS Traffic
Operation
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
passthru (default)
block
Access CLI Parameter
R
intrabss
RW
intrabssoptype
Syntax Example
[Device-Name]> set intrabssoptype <passthru (default)/block)>
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-61
Inventory Management Commands
Inventory Management Commands
Inventory Management Parameters
Name
Type
System Inventory
Subgroup
Management
Component Table
Subgroup
Component Interface Subgroup
Table
Values
N/A
N/A
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
sysinvmgmt
R
R
sysinvmgmtcmptbl
sysinvmgmtcmpiftbl
NOTE:
The inventory management commands display advanced
information about the AP’s installed components. You may be asked
to report this information to a representative if you contact customer
support.
IP Access Table Commands
IP Access Table Parameters
When creating table entries, you may either specify the argument name
followed by argument value or simply entering the argument value. When
only the argument value is specified, then enter the values in the order
depicted by the following table. CLI applies default values to the omitted
A-62
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
IP Access Table Commands
arguments. Due to the nature of the information, the only argument that
can be omitted is the “comment” argument.
Name
IP Access Table
Table Index
IP Address
IP Mask
Comment
(optional)
Status (optional)
Type
Table
Integer
IpAddress
IpAddress
DisplayString
Integer
Values
N/A
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
enable (default)
disable
delete
Access CLI Parameter
R
mgmtipaccesstbl
N/A
index
RW
ipaddr
RW
ipmask
RW
cmt
RW
status
Syntax Examples
Edit Management IP Access Table
[Device-Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl <index> ipaddr <IP address>
ipmask <subnet mask>
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-63
IP Commands
IP Commands
IP Configuration Parameters
Name
Type
Network
Group
IP Configuration Group
Values
N/A
N/A
IP Address
IP Mask
Default Router
IP Address
Default TTL
IpAddress
IpAddress
IpAddress
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
Integer
Address Type
Integer
User Defined
(seconds)
64 (default)
static
Access CLI Parameter
R
network
R
ip (Note: The
network and ip
parameters display
the same information)
RW
ipaddr
RW
ipmask
RW
ipgw
RW
ipttl
RW
ipaddrtype
dynamic (default)
NOTE:
The IP Address Assignment Type (ipaddrtype) must be set to static
before the IP Address (ipaddr), IP Mask (ipmask) or Default
Gateway IP Address (ipgw) values can be entered.
A-64
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Link Integrity Commands
NOTE:
The IP Subnet Mask of the AP must match your network’s Subnet
Mask.
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device-Name]> set ipaddr <fixed IP address of unit>
[Device-Name]> set ipsubmask <IP Mask>
[Device-Name]> set ipgw <gateway IP address>
[Device-Name]> show network
Link Integrity Commands
Link Integrity Parameters
Name
Link Integrity
Link Integrity
Status
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
linkint
RW
linkintstatus
disable (default)
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-65
Link Integrity Commands
Name
Link Integrity Poll
Interval
Type
Integer
Link Integrity Poll
Retransmissions
Integer
Values
500 - 15000 ms
(in increments of
500ms)
500 ms (default)
0 - 255
Access CLI Parameter
RW
linkintpollint
RW
linkintpollretx
5 (default)
2 of 2
IP Target Table Parameters
Name
Link Integrity IP
Target Table
Table Index
Target IP Address
Comment
(optional)
Status (optional)
Type
Table
Integer
IpAddress
DisplayString
Integer
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
linkinttbl
1-5
User Defined
User Defined (up to
254 characters)
enable
N/A
RW
RW
index
ipaddr
cmt
RW
status
disable (default)
delete
A-66
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Link Integrity Commands
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> show linkinttbl (this shows the current links)
[Device-Name]> set linkinttbl <1-5 (depending on what table row
you wish to address)> ipaddr <ip address of the host computer
you want to check>
[Device-Name]> set linkintpollint <the interval between link
integrity checks>
[Device-Name]> set linkintpollretx <number of times to
retransmit before considering the link down>
[Device-Name]> set linkintstatus enable
[Device-Name]> show linkinttbl (confirm new settings)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-67
MAC Access Control Commands
MAC Access Control Commands
MAC Access Control Parameters
Name
MAC Address
Control
Status
Operation Type
Type
Group
Values
N/A
Integer
Integer
Access CLI Parameter
R
macacl
enable
disable (default)
passthru (default)
block
RW
macaclstatus
RW
macacloptype
MAC Access Control Table Parameters
Name
MAC Address
Control Table
Table Index
MAC Address
Type
Table
N/A
PhysAddress
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
macacltbl
N/A
User Defined
R
RW
index
macaddr
1 of 2
A-68
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
MAC Access Control Commands
Name
Comment
(optional)
Type
DisplayString
Status (optional)
Integer
Values
User Defined
max 254
characters
enable (default)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
cmt
RW
status
disable
delete
2 of 2
Syntax Examples
Setup MAC (Address) Access Control
[Device-Name]> set macaclstatus enable
[Device-Name]> set macacloptype <passthru, block>
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Add an Entry to the MAC Access Control Table
[Device-Name]> set macacltbl <index> macaddr <MAC Address>
status enable
[Device-Name]> show macacltbl
Disable or Delete an Entry in the MAC Access Control Table
[Device-Name]> set macacltbl <index> status <disable/delete>
[Device-Name]> show macacltbl
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-69
Monitoring Parameters
NOTE:
For larger networks that include multiple Access Points, you may
prefer to maintain this list on a centralized location using the
RADIUS parameters (see RADIUS Commands).
Monitoring Parameters
Using the show command with the following table parameters will display
operating statistics for the AP (these are the same statistics that are
described in Monitor Information for the HTTP Web interface).
• staticmp: Displays the ICMP Statistics.
• statarptbl: Displays the IP ARP Table Statistics.
• statbridgetbl: Displays the Learn Table.
• statiapp: Displays the IAPP Statistics.
• statradius: Displays the RADIUS Authentication Statistics.
• statif: Displays information and statistics about the Ethernet and
wireless interfaces.
• stat802.11: Displays additional statistics for the wireless interfaces.
• statethernet: Displays additional statistics for the Ethernet
interface.
• statmss: Displays station statistics and Wireless Distribution
System links.
A-70
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Packet Forwarding Commands
Packet Forwarding Commands
Packet Forwarding Parameters
The following parameters control the Packet Forwarding feature, which
redirects wireless traffic to a specific MAC address:
Name
Type
Packet Forwarding Group
MAC Address
Packet Forwarding MacAddress
MAC Address
Packet Forwarding Integer
Status
Packet Forwarding
Interface Port
Integer
Values
N/A
Access CLI
R
pktfwd
User Defined
RW
pktfwdmacaddr
enable
RW
pktfwdstatus
disable (default)
0 (any) (default)
RW
pktfwdif
1 (Ethernet)
2 (WDS 1)
3 (WDS 2)
4 (WDS 3)
5 (WDS 4)
6 (WDS 5)
7 (WDS 6)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-71
RAD Commands
NOTE:
The Wireless Distribution System (WDS) feature is not available for
802.11a or 802.11b/g APs at this time.
RAD Commands
The Rogue AP Detection (RAD) feature enables an additional security
level for wireless LAN deployments. The RAD feature provides a
mechanism for detecting Rogue Access Points by utilizing the coverage
of the trusted Access Point deployment.
The Rogue AP Scan employs background scanning using low-level
802.11 scanning functions for effective wireless detection of Access
Points in its coverage area with minimal impact on the normal operation of
the Access Point.
The set radstatus command enables Rogue Access Point Detection.
The scan repetition duration (radscanint) is also configurable.
A-72
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RAD Commands
Rogue Access Point Detection (RAD) Parameters
Name
Type
Values
Access
CLI Parameter
Rogue Access
Point Detection
(RAD)
Group
N/A
R
rad
Status
Integer
enable
RW
radstatus
RW
radscanint
disable (default)
Scan Interval
Integer
15-1440 (minutes)
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set radstatus enable
[Device-Name]> set radscanint <15-1440>
[Device-Name]> show rad
Figure A-14.
Results of “show rad” CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-73
RADIUS Commands
RADIUS Commands
Avaya Wireless devices that use RADIUS authentication or accounting
support a primary and backup RADIUS server for MAC-based
authentication and a primary and backup RADIUS server for EAP/802.1x
authentication. The configuration parameters and statistics are the same
for both primary and backup servers.
The CLI differentiates the primary and backup RADIUS parameters by
using the table index:
• Index 1: Primary MAC-based authentication server
• Index 2: Backup MAC-based authentication server
• Index 3: Primary EAP/802.1x authentication server
• Index 4: Backup EAP/802.1x authentication server
General RADIUS Parameters
Name
RADIUS
MAC Access
Control Status
Authorization
Lifetime
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
radius
R
radmacacctrl
disable (default)
Integer32 900 – 43200 seconds
RW
radauthlifetm
0 sec. (default, disabled)
1 of 2
A-74
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS Commands
Name
MAC Address
Format
Type
Integer
Values
dashdelimited (default)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
radmacaddrformat
colondelimited
singledashdelimited
RADIUS
Accounting Status
Accounting
Inactivity Timer
Integer
no delimiter
enable
disable (default)
Integer32 0 – 2147483647
minutes; default is 5 min.
RW
radaccstatus
RW
radaccinactivetmr
2 of 2
RADIUS Authentication Parameters
NOTE:
Use a server name only if you have enabled the DNS Client
functionality. See DNS Client Commands.
Name
Type
RADIUS Authentication Table
Primary MAC-based
Integer
authentication server
Backup MAC-based
Integer
authentication server
Primary EAP/802.1x
Integer
authentication server
Values
N/A
1
Access CLI Parameter
R
radiustbl
R
index
2
R
index
3
R
index
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-75
RADIUS Commands
Name
Type
Backup EAP/802.1x
Integer
authentication server
RADIUS Server Status Integer
Values
4
Access CLI Parameter
R
index
Server Addressing
Format (see note)
Integer
enable
disable (default)
ipaddr (default)
RW
seraddrfmt
Server IP Address or
Name
IpAddress
name
User Defined
RW
ipaddr
Port (optional)
Integer
(enter an IP
address if
seraddrfmt is
ipaddr or a name if
set to name; up to
254 characters if
using a name)
User Defined
RW
port
Shared Secret
DisplayStr
ing
Integer
1812 (default)
User Defined
max 63 characters
1 – 4 seconds
W
ssecret
RW
responsetm
Integer
3 sec (default)
0–4
RW
maxretx
Response Time (sec)
Maximum
Retransmissions
(optional)
DisplayStr
ing
RW
status
3 (default)
2 of 2
A-76
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS Commands
RADIUS Accounting Parameters
NOTE:
Use a server name only if you have enabled the DNS Client
functionality. See DNS Client Commands.
Name
Type
RADIUS
Table
Accounting
Primary RADIUS
Integer
Backup RADIUS
Integer
RADIUS Server
Integer
Status
Server Addressing Integer
Format (see note)
Server IP Address
or Name
IpAddress
Port (optional)
Integer
Shared Secret
DisplayString
Display
String
Values
N/A
1
2
enable
disable (default)
ipaddr (default)
Access CLI Parameter
R
radacctbl
R
R
RW
index
index
status
RW
seraddrfmt
name
User Defined
RW
ipaddr
(enter an IP address if
seraddrfmt is ipaddr or
a name if set to name;
up to 254 characters if
using a name)
User Defined
RW
port
W
ssecret
1813 (default)
User Defined
max 63 characters
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-77
RADIUS Commands
Name
Response Time
(sec)
Type
Integer
Values
1 – 4 seconds
Integer
3 sec (default)
1 – 10
Maximum
Retransmissions
(optional)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
responsetm
RW
maxretx
3 (default)
2 of 2
Syntax Examples
Configure RADIUS Authentication server
[Device-Name]> set radiustbl <index> status enable seraddrfmt
<ipaddr or name> ipaddr <RADIUS IP address or name> port <user
defined> ssecret <user defined> responsetm <1 to 10 seconds>
maxretx <0 to 4 times>
[Device-Name]> show radiustbl
A-78
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS Commands
Figure A-15.
Results of “show radiustbl” CLI command
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-79
RADIUS Commands
Enable RADIUS MAC Access Control
[Device-Name]> set radmacaccctrl enable
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Set MAC Address Format Type
[Device-Name]> set radmacaddrformat <dashdelimited,
colondelimited, singledashdelimited, nodelimiter>
Set Authorization Lifetime (for MAC-based authentication or
EAP/802.1x authentication)
[Device-Name]> set radauthlifetm <900–43200 seconds; default is
0 (disabled)>
Enable RADIUS Accounting
[Device-Name]> set radaccstatus enable
[Device-Name]> set radaccinactivetmr <inactivity timer in
minutes>
[Device-Name]> show radius
A-80
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
RADIUS Commands
Figure A-16.
Result of “show radius” CLI Command
Configure RADIUS Accounting server
[Device-Name]> set radacctbl <index> status <enable> seraddrfmt
<ipaddr or name> ipaddr <RADIUS IP address or name> port <user
defined> ssecret <user defined> responsetm <1 to 4 seconds>
maxretx <1 to 10 times>
[Device-Name]> show radacctbl
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-81
Secure Management Commands
Figure A-17.
Results of “show radacctbl” CLI command
Secure Management Commands
Secure Management Parameters
Name
Secure
Management
A-82
Type
Integer
Values
Enable/Disable
Access CLI Parameter
RW
securemgmtstatus
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Serial Port Commands
Serial Port Commands
Serial Port Parameters
Name
Serial
Baud Rate
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
2400, 4800,
Access CLI Parameter
R
serial
RW
serbaudrate
9600 (default),
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Flow Control
Integer
Integer
Integer
Value
19200, 38400,
57600
8
none
1
none (default)
R
R
R
RW
serdatabits
serparity
serstopbits
serflowctrl
xonxoff
NOTE:
To avoid unexpected performance issues, leave Flow Control at the
default setting (none) unless you are sure what this setting should
be.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-83
SNMP Commands
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set serbaudrate <2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600>
[Device-Name]> set serflowctrl <none, xonxoff>
[Device-Name]> show serial
Figure A-18.
Result of “show serial” CLI Command
SNMP Commands
SNMP Parameters
! CAUTION:
Avaya strongly urges you to change the default passwords to restrict
access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform the Reset to Factory
Default Procedure.
A-84
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SNMP Commands
Name
SNMP
SNMP
Management
Interface Bitmask
Type
Group
Interface
Bitmask
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
snmp
RW
snmpifbitmask
0 or 2 - no
interfaces (disable)
1 or 3 - Ethernet
4 or 6 - Wireless
DisplayString
5 or 7 - all
interfaces (default
is 7)
User Defined
W
snmprpasswd
Read/Write
Password
DisplayString
public (default)
max 63 characters
User Defined
W
snmprwpasswd
SNMPv3
Authentication
Password
DisplayString
public (default)
max 63 characters
User Defined
W
snmpv3authpass
wd
SNMPv3 Privacy
Password
DisplayString
public (default)
max 63 characters
User Defined
W
snmpv3privpass
wd
Read Password
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
public (default)
max 63 characters
A-85
SNMP Commands
SNMP Trap Host Table Parameters
When creating table entries, you specify the argument name followed by
an argument value. The CLI applies default values to the omitted
arguments. Due to the nature of the information, the only argument that
can be omitted is the “comment” argument.
NOTE:
Up to 10 entries can be added to the SNMP Trap Host Table.
Name
Type
Values
Access CLI Parameter
SNMP Trap Host Table
N/A
R
snmptraphosttbl
Table
Table Index
Integer
User Defined
N/A
index
IP Address
IpAddress
User Defined
RW
ipaddr
Password
DisplayString User Defined (up to
W
passwd
64 characters)
Comment
DisplayString User Defined (up to
RW
cmt
(optional)
254 characters)
Status (optional)
Integer
enable (default)
RW
status
disable
delete
A-86
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
SNMP Commands
Syntax Examples
Change SNMP Passwords
[Device-Name]> set snmprpasswd <New Password> (SNMP read
password)
[Device-Name]> set snmprwpasswd <New Password> (SNMP read/write)
[Device-Name]> set snmpv3authpasswd <New Password> (SNMPv3
authentication password)
[Device-Name]> set snmpv3privpasswd <New Password> (SNMPv3
privacy password)
Configure Management Interfaces
[Device-Name]> set snmpifbitmask <(see Table A-3)>
Choose from the following values:
Table A-3
Interface Bitmask Values
Interface Bitmask
Description
0 or 2 = disable (all interfaces)
All management channels disabled
1 or 3 = Ethernet only
Ethernet only enabled
4 or 6 = Wireless only
Wireless only enabled
5 or 7 = all interfaces
All management channels enabled
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-87
Spanning Tree Commands
Spanning Tree Commands
Spanning Tree Parameters
Name
Spanning Tree
Spanning Tree
Status
Type
Group
Integer
Bridge Priority
Integer
Maximum Age
Integer
Hello Time
Integer
Forward Delay
Integer
A-88
Values
N/A
enable (default)
disable
0 – 65535
32768 (default)
600 – 4000
(in 0.01 sec
intervals; i.e., 6 to
40 seconds)
2000 (default)
100 – 1000
(in 0.01 sec
intervals; i.e., 1 to
10 seconds)
200 (default)
400 – 3000
(in 0.01 sec
intervals; i.e., 4 to
30 seconds)
1500 (default)
Access CLI Parameter
R
stp
RW
stpstatus
RW
stppriority
RW
stpmaxage
RW
stphellotime
RW
stpfwddelay
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Spanning Tree Commands
Spanning Tree Priority and Path Cost Table
Name
Spanning Tree
Table
Table Index (Port)
Priority
Type
Table
N/A
Integer
Path Cost
Integer
State
Integer
Values
N/A
1 – 15
0 – 255
128 (default)
1 – 65535
100 (default)
disable
Access CLI Parameter
R
stpbl
R
RW
index
priority
RW
pathcost
R
state
RW
status
blocking
listening
learning
forwarding
Status
Integer
broken
enable
disable
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-89
SpectraLink VoIP Commands
SpectraLink VoIP Commands
SpectraLink VoIP Parameters (802.11b and bg Modes Only)
These parameters enable or disable the SpectraLink Voice over IP
feature.
The Spectralink Legacy Support parameter should be enabled if the AP is
operating in 802.11bg mode and legacy 802.11 Spectralink telephones
are used. This parameter will set the basic rates of the AP to be 1 and 2
Mbps in 802.11bg mode and will allow old telephones that operate only at
the 1 and 2 Mbps basic rate to connect to the AP.
Name
Type
Spectralink VoIP
Group
Spectralink VoIP
Integer
Status
Spectralink Legacy Integer
Support
A-90
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
spectralink
enable
RW
speclinkstatus
disable (default)
enable
RW
speclinklegacysupport
disable (default)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Storm Threshold Commands
Storm Threshold Commands
Storm Threshold Parameters
Name
Storm Threshold
Broadcast
Threshold
Type
Group
Integer
Multicast Threshold Integer
Values
N/A
0 – 255
packets/sec
(default is 0)
0 – 255
packets/sec
(default is 0)
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
stmthres
RW
stmbrdthres
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
stmthrestbl
RW
stmmultithres
Storm Threshold Table
Name
Storm Threshold
Table
Table Index
Type
Table
Integer
1 = Ethernet
R
index
3 = Wireless
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-91
Syslog Commands
Name
Broadcast
Threshold
Type
Integer
Multicast Threshold Integer
Values
0 – 255
packets/sec
(default is 0)
0 – 255
packets/sec
(default is 0)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
bcast
RW
mcast
2 of 2
Syslog Commands
Syslog Parameters
The following parameters configure the Syslog settings.
Name
Syslog
Syslog Status
Syslog Port
Type
Group
Integer
Octet String
Values
N/A
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
syslog
RW
syslogstatus
disable (default)
514
R
syslogport
1 of 2
A-92
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Syslog Commands
Name
Syslog Lowest
Priority Logged
Type
Integer
Values
1–7
Access CLI Parameter
RW
syslogpritolog
1 = LOG_ALERT
2 = LOG_CRIT
3 = LOG_ERR
4 = LOG_
WARNING
5 = LOG_NOTICE
6 = LOG_INFO
(default)
Heartbeat Status
Heartbeat Interval
(seconds)
Integer
Integer
7 = LOG_DEBUG
enable (1)
disable (2)
(default)
1 – 604800
seconds;
900 sec. (default)
RW
sysloghbstatus
RW
sysloghbinterval
2 of 2
NOTE:
The Heartbeat parameters are advanced settings not available via
the HTTP interface. When Heartbeat is enabled, the AP periodically
sends a message to the Syslog server to indicate that it is active.
The frequency with which the heartbeat message is sent depends
upon the setting of the Heartbeat Interval.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-93
Syslog Commands
Syslog Host Table Parameters
The table described below configures the Syslog hosts that will receive
message from the AP. You can configure up to ten Syslog hosts.
Name
Syslog Host Table
Table Index
IP Address
Comment (optional)
Status (optional)
Type
Table
Integer
IpAddress
DisplayString
Integer
Values
N/A
1 – 10
User Defined
User Defined
enable
disable
delete
Access CLI Parameter
R
sysloghosttbl
N/A
index
RW
ipaddr
RW
cmt
RW
status
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set syslogpriority <1-7 (default is 6)>
[Device-Name]> set syslogstatus <enable/disable>
A-94
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
System Information Commands
System Information Commands
System Parameters
Name
System
Name
Location
Contact Name
Contact E-mail
Contact Phone
FLASH Backup
Interval
Flash Update
System OID
Descriptor
Type
Values
Access CLI Parameter
Group
N/A
R
system
Display String User Defined
RW
sysname
Display String User Defined
RW
sysloc
Display String User Defined
RW
sysctname
Display String User Defined
RW
sysctemail
RW
sysctphone
Display String User Defined
Maximum 254
characters
Integer
0 - 65535 seconds RW
sysflashbckint
0
DisplayString
DisplayString
1
N/A
System Name,
flash version, S/N,
bootloader version
RW
sysflashupdate
R
R
sysoid
sysdescr
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-95
System Information Commands
Name
Up Time
Type
Integer
Values
dd:hh:mm:ss
Access CLI Parameter
R
sysuptime
dd – days
hh – hours
mm – minutes
Emergency
Restore to
defaults
ss – seconds
Resets all
parameters to
default factory
values
RW
sysresettodefaults
Note: You must
enter the following
command twice to
reset to defaults:
set
sysresettodefaults
1
2 of 2
Syntax Examples
[Device-Name]> set sysname <system name> sysloc <Unit Location>
[Device-Name]> set sysctname <Contact Name (person responsible
for system)>
[Device-Name]> set sysctphone <Contact Phone Number> sysctemail
<Contact E-mail address>
[Device-Name]> show system
A-96
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Telnet Commands
Figure A-19.
Result of “show system” CLI Command
Telnet Commands
Telnet Parameters
Name
Telnet
Telnet
Management
Interface Bitmask
Type
Group
Interface
Bitmask
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
telnet
RW
telifbitmask
0 or 2 - no
interfaces (disable)
1 or 3 - Ethernet
4 or 6 - Wireless
5 or 7 - all
interfaces (default
is 7)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-97
Telnet Commands
Name
Telnet Port
Type
Integer
Values
User Defined
Access CLI Parameter
RW
telport
Telnet Login
Inactivity Time-out
Integer
23 (default)
1 – 300 seconds
RW
tellogintout
Telnet Session Idle
Time-out
Integer
30 sec (default)
1 - 900 seconds
RW
telsessiontout
900 sec (default)
Syntax Examples
Configure Management Interfaces
[Device-Name]> set telifbitmask <(see Table A-4)>
Choose from the following values:
Table A-4
Interface Bitmask Values
Interface Bitmask
Description
0 or 2 = disable (all interfaces)
All management channels disabled
1 or 3 = Ethernet only
Ethernet only enabled
4 or 6 = Wireless only
Wireless only enabled
5 or 7 = all interfaces
All management channels enabled
A-98
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
TFTP Commands
Set TCP Port
[Device-Name]> set telport <Telnet port number (default is 23)>
Set Telnet Session Timeouts
[Device-Name]> set tellogintout <time in seconds between 1 and
300 (default is 30)>
[Device-Name]> set telsessiontout <time in seconds between 1 and
36000 (default is 900)>
TFTP Commands
TFTP Server Parameters
These parameters relate to upload and download commands.
When a user executes an upload or download command, the specified
arguments are stored in TFTP parameters for future use. If nothing is
specified in the command line when issuing subsequent upload or
download commands, the stored arguments are used.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-99
TFTP Commands
Name
Type
TFTP
Group
TFTP Server IP IpAddress
Address
TFTP File
DisplayString
Name
TFTP File Type Integer
Values
N/A
User Defined
Access CLI Parameter
R
tftp
RW
tftpipaddr
User Defined
RW
tftpfilename
img
RW
tftpfiletype
config
bootloader
Syntax Examples
Download an AP Configuration File from a TFTP Server
First start your TFTP program. It must be running and configured to
transmit and receive.
[Device-Name]> set tftpfilename <file name> tftpfiletype config
tftpipaddr <IP address of your TFTP server>
[Device-Name]> show tftp (to ensure the filename, file type, and the IP
address are correct)
[Device-Name]> download *
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
A-100
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
TFTP Commands
After following the complete process (above) once, you can download a
file of the same name (as long as all the other parameters are the same),
with the following command:
[Device-Name]> download *
Backup your AP Configuration File to a TFTP Server
First start your TFTP program. It must be running and configured to
transmit and receive.
[Device-Name]> upload <TFTP Server IP address> <tftpfilename
(such as “config.sys”)> config
[Device-Name]> show tftp (to ensure the filename, file type, and
the IP address are correct)
After setting the TFTP parameters, you can back up your current file (as
long as all the other parameters are the same), with the following
command:
[Device-Name]> upload *
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-101
WDS Commands
WDS Commands
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Parameters
Name
WDS Table
Port Index
Status
Partner MAC
Address
Type
Table
Integer
Integer
PhysAddress
Values
Access CLI Parameter
N/A
R
wdstbl
3.1 - 3.6 (Wireless)
R
portindex
enable, disable
RW
status
User Defined
RW
partnermacaddr
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Security Table Parameters
The WDS Security Table manages WDS related security objects.
Name
WDS Security
Table
Table Index
Security Mode
Encryption Key 0
A-102
Type
Table
N/A
Values Access CLI Parameter
R
wdssectbl
Integer
Primary WNIC = 3
R
index
Integer
WEPKeyType
Secondary WNIC =
4
none, wep
N/A
RW
WO
secmode
encryptkey0
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands
The wireless interface group parameter is wif. For Single-radio APs, the
wireless interface uses table index 3.
See Interfaces for information on these parameters.
802.11a Parameters
Name
Wireless Interfaces
Table Index
Network Name
(SSID)
Auto Channel Select
(ACS)1
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
3 or 4 (Dual-radio
APs)
DisplayStrin 2 – 31 characters
g
My Wireless
Network (default)
Integer
enable (default)
DTIM Period
Integer
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
MAC Address
Closed System
Integer
PhyAddress
Integer
disable
1 – 255
1 = default
0 – 2347
Default is 2347 (off)
12 hex digits
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
wif
R
index
RW
netname
RW
autochannel
RW
dtimperiod
RW
medres
R
RW
macaddr
closedsys
disable (default)
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-103
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands
Access CLI Parameter
Name
Type
Values
Supported Frequency Octet String Depends on
R
suppchannels
Channels
Regulatory Domain
Load Balancing
Integer
enable (default)
RW
ldbalance
Operating Frequency
Channel
Integer
disable
Varies by
regulatory domain
and country. See
RW
channel
802.11a Channel
Frequencies
Supported Data
Rates
Transmit Rate
Octet String
See Transmit Rate,
R
suppdatarates
below
RW
txrate
Integer32
0 - Auto Fallback
(default)
6 Mbits/sec
9 Mbits/sec
12 Mbits/sec
18 Mbits/sec
24 Mbits/sec
36 Mbits/sec
48 Mbits/sec
54 Mbits/sec
R
phytype
Physical Layer Type
Integer
ofdm (orthogonal
frequency division
multiplexing) for
802.11a
Note 1: For 802.11a APs in Europe, Auto Channel Select is a read-only parameter; it is
always enabled.
2 of 2
A-104
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands
Syntax Examples
Network Name (SSID)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index 3> netname <Network Name (SSID)
for wireless interface>
[Device-Name]> show wif
Figure A-20.
Results of “show wif” CLI command for an AP
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-105
802.11a Wireless Interface Commands
Operational Mode
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> mode <see table>
Mode
Operational Mode
1
dot11b-only
2
dot11g-only
3
dot11bg
4
dot11a-only
5
dot11g-wifi
TX Power Control
The TX Power Control feature lets the user configure the transmit power
level of the card in the AP at one of four levels:
• 100% of the maximum transmit power level of the card
• 50%
• 25%
• 12.5%
A-106
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Perform the following commands to enable TX Power Control and set the
transmit power level:
[Device-Name]> set txpowercontrol enable
[Device-Name]> set wif <interface number> currenttxpowerlevel
<value>
Allowed values are: 1 (100%), 2 (50%), 3 (25%), 4 (12.5%)
Autochannel Select (ACS)
ACS is enabled by default. Reboot after disabling or enabling ACS.
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> autochannel <enable/disable>
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Enable/Disable Closed System
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> closedsys <enable/disable>
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
The wireless interface group parameter is wif. For Single-radio APs, the
wireless interface uses table index 3.
See Interfaces for information on these parameters.
Jack--Why are mode and tx power control not in the tables?
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-107
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
802.11b Parameters
Name
Wireless Interfaces
Table Index
Network Name
(SSID)
Auto Channel Select
(ACS)1
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
3 or 4 (Dual-radio
APs)
DisplayString 2 – 31 characters
My Wireless
Network (default)
Integer
enable (default)
DTIM Period
Integer
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
MAC Address
Closed System
Integer
Supported Frequency
Channels
Load Balancing
PhyAddress
Integer
Octet String
Integer
disable
1 – 255
1 = default
0 – 2347
Default is 2347 (off)
12 hex digits
enable
disable (default)
Depends on
Regulatory Domain
enable (default)
Access CLI Parameter
R
wif
R
index
RW
netname
RW
autochannel
RW
dtimperiod
RW
medres
R
RW
macaddr
closedsys
R
suppchannels
RW
ldbalance
disable
1 of 3
A-108
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Name
Distance between
APs
Type
Integer
Values
large (default)
Access CLI Parameter
RW
distaps
medium
small
minicell
Interference
Robustness
Integer
Operating Frequency
Channel
Integer
Multicast Rate
Integer
microcell
enable (default)
disable
1 - 14; available
channels vary by
regulatory
domain/country;
see 802.11b Channel
RW
interrobust
RW
channel
RW
multrate
Frequencies
1 Mbits/sec (1)
2 Mbits/sec (2)
(default)
5.5 Mbits/sec (3)
Closed Wireless
System
Integer
11 Mbits/sec (4)
enable
RW
closedsys
Medium Distribution
Integer
disable (default)
enable (default)
RW
meddendistrib
MAC Address
PhyAddress
disable
12 hex digits
R
macaddr
2 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-109
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Name
Supported Data
Rates
Type
Octet String
Values
1 Mbits/sec
Access CLI Parameter
R
suppdatarates
2 Mbits/sec
5.5 Mbits/sec
Transmit Rate
Integer32
11 Mbits/sec
0 (auto fallback default)
RW
txrate
1 Mbits/sec
2 Mbits/sec
5.5 Mbits/sec
Supported Frequency
Channels
Physical Layer Type
Octet String
Regulatory Domain
List
DisplayString
Integer
11 Mbits/sec
Depends on
Regulatory Domain
dsss (direct
sequence spread
spectrum) for
802.11b
U.S./Canada -FCC
R
suppchannels
R
phytype
R
regdomain
Europe -- ETSI
Japan -- MKK
Note 1: For 802.11a APs in Europe, Auto Channel Select is a read-only parameter; it is
always enabled.
3 of 3
A-110
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Syntax Examples
Network Name (SSID)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index 3> netname <Network Name (SSID)
for wireless interface>
[Device-Name]> show wif
For results of the show wif command, see Figure A-20.
Operational Mode
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> mode <see table>
Mode
Operational Mode
1
dot11b-only
2
dot11g-only
3
dot11bg
4
dot11a-only
5
dot11g-wifi
TX Power Control
The TX Power Control feature lets the user configure the transmit power
level of the card in the AP at one of four levels:
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-111
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
• 100% of the maximum transmit power level of the card
• 50%
• 25%
• 12.5%
Perform the following commands to enable TX Power Control and set the
transmit power level:
[Device-Name]> set txpowercontrol enable
[Device-Name]> set wif <interface number> currenttxpowerlevel
<value>
Allowed values are: 1 (100%), 2 (50%), 3 (25%), 4 (12.5%)
Autochannel Select (ACS)
ACS is enabled by default. Reboot after disabling or enabling ACS.
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> autochannel <enable/disable>
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Enable/Disable Closed System
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> closedsys <enable/disable>
A-112
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Enable/Disable Interference Robustness (802.11b Only)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> interrobust <enable/disable>
Enable/Disable Load Balancing (802.11b Only)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> ldbalance <enable/disable>
Enable/Disable Medium Density Distribution (802.11b Only)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> meddendistrib <enable/disable>
Set the Distance Between APs (802.11b Only)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> distaps <large, medium, small,
minicell, microcell>
[Device-Name]> reboot
NOTE:
The distance between APs should not be approximated. It is
calculated by means of a manual Site Survey, in which an AP is set
up and clients are tested throughout the area to determine signal
strength and coverage, and local limits such as physical
interference are investigated. From these measurements the
appropriate cell size and density is determined, and the optimum
distance between APs is calculated to suit your particular business
requirements.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-113
802.11b Wireless Interface Commands
Set the Multicast Rate (802.11b Only)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> multrate <1,2,5.5,11 (Mbits/sec)>
NOTE:
The Distance Between APs must be set before the Multicast Rate.
NOTE:
There is an inter-dependent relationship between the Distance
between APs and the Multicast Rate. In general, larger systems
operate at lower average transmit rates.
Distance between APs
A-114
Multicast Rate
Large
1 and 2 Mbits/sec
Medium
1, 2, and 5.5 Mbits/sec
Small
1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec
Minicell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec
Microcell
1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
The wireless interface group parameter is wif. For Single-radio APs, the
wireless interface uses table index 3.
See Interfaces for information on these parameters.
802.11b/g Parameters
Name
Wireless Interfaces
Table Index
Network Name
(SSID)
Auto Channel Select
(ACS)1
Type
Group
Integer
Values
N/A
3 or 4 (Dual-radio
APs)
DisplayStrin 2 – 31 characters
g
My Wireless
Network (default)
Integer
enable (default)
DTIM Period
Integer
RTS/CTS Medium
Reservation
MAC Address
Closed System
Integer
PhyAddress
Integer
disable
1 – 255
1 = default
0 – 2347
Default is 2347 (off)
12 hex digits
enable
Access CLI Parameter
R
wif
R
index
RW
netname
RW
autochannel
RW
dtimperiod
RW
medres
R
RW
macaddr
closedsys
disable (default)
1 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-115
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
Access CLI Parameter
Name
Type
Values
Supported Frequency Octet String Depends on
R
suppchannels
Channels
Regulatory Domain
Load Balancing
Integer
enable (default)
RW
ldbalance
Wireless Operational
Mode
Integer
disable
dot11b-only
RW
mode
RW
channel
dot11g-only
dot11bg (default)
Operating Frequency
Channel
Integer
Supported Data
Rates
Octet String
dot11g-wifi
1 - 14; available
channels vary by
regulatory
domain/country;
see 802.11g Channel
Frequencies
See Transmit Rate,
next.
R
suppdatarates
2 of 4
A-116
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
Name
Transmit Rate
Type
Integer32
Values
For 802.11b-only
mode:
Access CLI Parameter
RW
txrate
0 (auto fallback default)
1 Mbits/sec
2 Mbits/sec
5.5 Mbits/sec
11 Mbits/sec
For 802.11g-only
mode:
0 (auto fallback default)
6 Mbits/sec
9 Mbits/sec
12 Mbits/sec
18 Mbits/sec
24 Mbits/sec
36 Mbits/sec
48 Mbits/sec
54 Mbits/sec
36 Mbits/sec
48 Mbits/sec
54 Mbits/sec
3 of 4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-117
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
Name
Transmit Rate
(continued)
Type
Integer32
Values
For 802.11g-wifi
and 802.11bg
modes:
Access CLI Parameter
RW
txrate
0 (auto fallback default)
1 Mbits/sec
2 Mbits/sec
5.5 Mbits/sec
11 Mbits/sec
6 Mbits/sec
9 Mbits/sec
12 Mbits/sec
18 Mbits/sec
24 Mbits/sec
Physical Layer Type
Integer
ERP (Extended
R
phytype
Rate Protocol)
Note 1: For 802.11a APs in Europe, Auto Channel Select is a read-only parameter; it
is always enabled.
4 of 4
Network Name (SSID)
[Device-Name]> set wif <index 3> netname <Network Name (SSID)
for wireless interface>
[Device-Name]> show wif
For results of the show wif command, see Figure A-20.
A-118
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
Operational Mode
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> mode <see table>
Mode
Operational Mode
1
dot11b-only
2
dot11g-only
3
dot11bg
4
dot11a-only
5
dot11g-wifi
TX Power Control
The TX Power Control feature lets the user configure the transmit power
level of the card in the AP at one of four levels:
• 100% of the maximum transmit power level of the card
• 50%
• 25%
• 12.5%
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-119
802.11b/g Wireless Interface Commands
Perform the following commands to enable TX Power Control and set the
transmit power level:
[Device-Name]> set txpowercontrol enable
[Device-Name]> set wif <interface number> currenttxpowerlevel
<value>
Allowed values are: 1 (100%), 2 (50%), 3 (25%), 4 (12.5%)
Autochannel Select (ACS)
ACS is enabled by default. Reboot after disabling or enabling ACS.
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> autochannel <enable/disable>
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Enable/Disable Closed System
[Device-Name]> set wif <index> closedsys <enable/disable>
A-120
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security Commands
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security
Commands
Wireless Interface SSID Table Parameters
The Wireless Interface SSID table manages the SSID and VLAN pairs
and the security modes of those pairs.
NOTE:
The ability to configure up to 16 VLAN/SSID pairs and configure a
security mode per SSID is available only for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed.
Name
Type
Wireless Interface Table
SSID Table
Table Index
Integer
Table Index
SSID
VLAN ID
Table Row Status
Integer
DisplayString
VlanId
RowStatus
Values
N/A
Access CLI Parameter
R
wifssidtbl
Primary WNIC = 3
R
index
Secondary WNIC =
4
1 - 16 (SSID index)
0 - 32 characters
-1 - 4094
enable,
R
RW
RW
RW
ssidindex
ssid
vlanid
status
disable
1 of 3
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-121
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security Commands
Name
Security Mode
Type
Integer
Values
none
Access CLI Parameter
RW
secmode
dot1x
mixed
wpa
wpa-psk
Supported
Security Modes
DisplayString
wep
none
R
supsecmode
dot1x
mixed
wpa
wpa-psk
Encryption Key 0
Encryption Key 1
Encryption Key 2
Encryption Key 3
Encryption
Transmit Key
Encryption Key
Length
WEPKeyType
WEPKeyType
WEPKeyType
WEPKeyType
Integer32
wep
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
User Defined
0-3
WO
WO
WO
WO
RW
encryptkey0
encryptkey1
encryptkey2
encryptkey3
encryptkeytx
Integer
64
RW
encryptkeylength
128
152
2 of 3
A-122
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security Commands
Name
Type
Re-keying Interval Integer32
Values
60 – 65535
seconds
Access CLI Parameter
RW
rekeyint
default is 900 sec
Pre-Shared Key1
OctetString
Size 32
WO
pskey
DisplayString 0 to 255
WO
passphrase
PSK Pass
characters2
Phrase1
Note 1: Configure either the Pre-Shared Key or the PSK Pass Phrase (but not both)
to create a pre-shared key for WPA-PSK mode. Setting Pre-Shared Key will override
a previous PSK Pass Phrase setting. Similarly, setting PSK Pass Phrase will
override a previous Pre-Shared Key setting.
Note 2: Avaya recommends using a PSK Pass Phrase of at least 13 characters to
ensure that the generated key cannot be easily deciphered by network infiltrators.
3 of 3
Syntax Examples
To display the supported security modes on the wireless interfaces, use
the following command:
[Device-Name]> show wifssidtbl
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-123
Wireless Interface SSID/VLAN/Security Commands
To configure an SSID and VLAN pair, and the security mode associated
with the pair, use the following command:
Syntax:
[Device-Name]> set wifssidtbl <index>
<ssidindex> <ssid> <vlanid> <status> <secmode>
<encryptkey0> <encryptkey1> <encryptkey2>
<encryptkey3> <encryptkeytx> <encryptkeylength>
<rekeyint> <pskey> <passphrase>
Example: [Device-Name]> set wifssidtbl 3 2 Engineering
1050 enable WPA
Depending on the configured security mode, the following parameters
must be configured:
Security
Mode
Key 0
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Tx Key
Key
Length
Rekeying PSK
Interval Value
PSK Pass
Phrase
None
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
802.1x
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Active
Inactive Inactive
Inactive Inactive
Mixed
Inactive
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Active
Inactive Inactive
WPA
Inactive Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
WPA-PSK Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
WEP
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive Inactive
Active
Active
NOTE:
If you have two or more SSIDs per interface with a security mode of
None, be aware that security being applied in the VLAN is not being
applied in the wireless network.
A-124
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
NOTE:
If you set Security Mode to 802.1x, WPA, or Mixed, you also need to
configure the RADIUS Authentication parameters. If you set
Authentication Mode to Mixed, you also need to configure WEP
Encryption settings.
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
VLAN/SSID Parameters
Name
VLAN
Status
Management ID
Type
Group
Integer
Vlan Id
Values
N/A
enable
disable (default)
-1 (untagged)
Access
R
RW
RW
CLI Parameter
vlan
vlanstatus
vlanmgmtid
or 1-4094
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-125
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
VLAN ID Table
NOTE:
Sixteen VLAN/SSID pairs are available for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed. The AP-5
and AP-4 support only one VLAN/SSID pair.
Name
VLAN ID Table
Index1
Type
Table
Integer32
Identifier (ID)
Vlan Id
Network Name
(SSID)
Status
Display String
Integer
Values
N/A
3.1 - 3.16 (Wireless
A);
4.1 - 4.16 (Wireless
B; Dual-radio APs
only)
-1 or 0 (both
correspond to
untagged)
or 1-4094
2-31 characters
enable (default when
new entry created)
Access CLI Parameter
R
vlanidtbl
R
index
RW
id
RW
ssid
RW
status
disable
delete
Note 1: When adding a new entry to the table, you must specify the index instance
you want to configure, such as 3.5; the 0 index value is not applicable to this table and
does not create a new entry.
A-126
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
Syntax Examples
Enable VLAN Management
[Device-Name]> set vlanstatus enable
[Device-Name]> set vlanmgmtid <1-4094>
[Device-Name]> show vlandidtbl (to review your settings)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Disable VLAN Management
[Device-Name]> set vlanstatus disable or
[Device-Name]> set vlanmgmtid 0
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
Add an Entry to the VLAN ID Table
[Device-Name]> set vlanidtbl <index number; see table> id
<1-4094, -1=untagged> ssid <enter network name>
[Device-Name]> show vlandidtbl (to review your settings)
[Device-Name]> reboot 0
NOTE:
Sixteen VLAN/SSID pairs are available for the AP-6, and APs that
have an 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g Upgrade Kit installed. The AP-5
and AP-4 support only one VLAN/SSID pair.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
A-127
VLAN/SSID Pair Commands
A-128
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
B
ASCII Character Chart
Description
You can configure WEP Encryption Keys in either Hexadecimal or ASCII
format. Hexadecimal digits are 0-9 and A-F (not case sensitive). ASCII
characters are 0-9, A-F, a-f (case sensitive), and punctuation marks. Each
ASCII character corresponds to two hexadecimal digits.
The table below lists the ASCII characters that you can use to configure
WEP Encryption Keys. It also lists the Hexadecimal equivalent for each
ASCII character.
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
!
21
9
39
Q
51
i
69
"
22
:
3A
R
52
j
6A
#
23
;
3B
S
53
k
6B
$
24
<
3C
T
54
l
6C
%
25
=
3D
U
55
m
6D
&
26
>
3E
V
56
n
6E
'
27
?
3F
W
57
o
6F
(
28
@
40
X
58
p
70
)
29
A
41
Y
59
q
71
*
2A
B
42
Z
5A
r
72
+
2B
C
43
[
5B
s
73
,
2C
D
44
\
5C
t
74
-
2D
E
45
]
5D
u
75
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
B-1
Description
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
B-2
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
ASCII
Character
Hex
Equivalent
.
2E
F
46
^
5E
v
76
/
2F
G
47
_
5F
w
77
0
30
H
48
`
60
x
78
1
31
I
49
a
61
y
79
2
32
J
4A
b
62
z
7A
3
33
K
4B
c
63
{
7B
4
34
L
4C
d
64
|
7C
5
35
M
4D
e
65
}
7D
6
36
N
4E
f
66
~
7E
7
37
O
4F
g
67
8
38
P
50
h
68
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Specifications
C
In This Appendix
• Software Features
• Hardware Specifications
• Radio Specifications
Software Features
The tables below compare the software features available depending on
the card type in the Access Point:
• Number of Stations per BSS
• Management Functions
• Advanced Bridging Functions
• Medium Access Control (MAC) Functions
• Security Functions
• Network Functions
• Advanced Wireless Functions
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-1
Software Features
Number of Stations per BSS
Feature
AP-4
AP-6 &
11b/g Kit
AP-5
AP-6 &
11a/b/g Kit
Without
encryption
up to
250
up to
250
up to 250
up to 250
With WEP
encryption
up to
120
up to
120
up to 120
up to 120
With 802.1x
Authentication
up to 88
up to 88
up to 88
up to 88
With WPA
N/A
N/A
up to 27
up to 27
Management Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
Web User Interface
yes
yes
yes
Telnet / CLI
yes
yes
yes
SNMP Agent
yes
yes
yes
TFTP
yes
yes
yes
C-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Software Features
Advanced Bridging Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
IEEE 802.1d Bridging
yes
yes
yes
WDS Relay
yes
yes
yes
Roaming
yes
yes
yes
Protocol Filtering
yes
yes
yes
Multicast/Broadcast Storm
Filtering
yes
yes
yes
Proxy ARP
yes
yes
yes
TCP/UDP Port Filtering
yes
yes
yes
Blocking Intra BSS Clients
yes
yes
yes
Packet Forwarding
yes
yes
yes
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-3
Software Features
Medium Access Control (MAC) Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
Automatic Channel
Selection (ACS)
yes
yes
yes
Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) 1
N/A
yes
N/A
Closed System Feature
yes
yes
yes
TX Power Control
N/A
Available with
802.11a upgrade
kit. Not available
with 5Ghz
upgrade kit.
yes
Note 1: A user cannot manually select a channel for products sold in Europe; these
products require automatic channel selection using Dynamic Frequency Selection
(DFS).
C-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Software Features
Security Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
IEEE 802.11 WEP 1
yes
yes
yes
MAC Access Control
yes
yes
yes
RADIUS MAC-based Access
Control
yes
yes
yes
IEEE 802.1x Authentication 2
yes
yes
yes
Multiple Authentication
Server Support 4
yes
yes
yes
Rogue Access Point
Detection
no
yes
yes
1 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-5
Software Features
Feature
Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA)
802.11b
N/A
802.11a
Available with
AP-600a/b/g or
802.11a/b/g Upgrade
Kit
802.11b/g
yes
Not available with
AP-5
Note 1: Key lengths supported by 802.11a: 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit.
Key lengths supported by 802.11b: 64-bit and 128-bit.
Key lengths supported by 802.11b/g: 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit.
Note 2: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, and PEAP client supplicant supported.
Note 3: Use in conjunction with WPA or 802.1x Authentication.
Note 4: Support is provided for a primary and backup RADIUS authentication server
for both MAC-based authentication and 802.1x authentication.
2 of 2
C-6
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Software Features
Network Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
DHCP Client
yes
yes
yes
DHCP Server
yes
yes
yes
Inter Access Point
Protocol (IAPP)
yes
yes
yes
Link Integrity
yes
yes
yes
System Logging
(Syslog)
yes
yes
yes
RADIUS Accounting
Support 1
yes
yes
yes
DNS Client
yes
yes
yes
TCP/IP Protocol
Support
yes
yes
yes
Virtual LAN Support
One VLAN
ID per
wireless
interface
AP-5: One VLAN per
wireless interface
Up to 16
VLAN IDs
per wireless
interface
AP-5 with 802.11a/b/g
upgrade kit: Up to 16
VLAN IDs per
wireless interface
Note 1: Includes Fallback to Primary RADIUS Server, RADIUS Session Timeout,
RADIUS Multiple MAC Address Formats, RADIUS DNS Host Name Support,
RADIUS Start/Stop Accounting.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-7
Software Features
Advanced Wireless Functions
Feature
802.11b
802.11a
802.11b/g
WEP Plus
(Weak Key Avoidance)
yes
—
—
Remote Link Test
yes
—
—
Link Test Responder2
yes
yes
—
Load Balancing2
yes
yes
—
yes
—
—
yes
—
—
Distance between APs3
yes
—
—
Interference Robustness
yes
—
—
SpectraLink VoIP Support
yes
—
—
AP List2
Medium Density Distribution
3
Note 1: Available only one way (AP to client) if using an Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a
non-Avaya Wireless client.
Note 2: No client support in 802.11a or 802.11b/g.
Note 3: This feature is not available if you are using an Avaya 802.11a/b Card or a
non-Avaya Wireless client with an 802.11b AP.
C-8
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Hardware Specifications
Hardware Specifications
Physical Specifications
AP (without metal base)
Dimensions (H x W x L) = 3.5 x 17 x 21.5 cm (1.5 x 6.75 x 8.5 in.)
Weight = 0.68 kg (1.50 lb.)
Electrical Specifications
Using the Power Adapter
Voltage (Input) = 100 to 240 VAC (50-60 Hz) @ 0.4 A
Voltage (Output) = 12 VDC
Power Consumption = 10 Watts
Using Power over Ethernet
Input Voltage = 42 to 60 VDC
Output Current = 200mA at 48V
Power Consumption = 10 Watts
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-9
Hardware Specifications
Environmental Specifications
AP Unit
• Operating Temperature = 0° to +55°C ambient temperature (without
plastic cabinet)
• Operating Humidity = 95% maximum (non condensing)
• Storage Temperature = -20 to +75°C ambient temperature
• Storage Humidity = 95% maximum (non condensing)
NOTE:
For AP-6 units operating at temperatures above 50°C (122°F), we
recommend that the plastic enclosure be removed.
Ethernet Interface
10/100 Base-TX, RJ-45 female socket
Serial Port Interface
Standard RS-232C interface with DB-9, female connector
C-10
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
Power over Ethernet Interface
Category 5, foiled, twisted pair cables must be used to ensure compliance
with FCC Part 15, subpart B, Class B requirements
Standard 802.3af pin assignments
HTTP Interface
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 with Service Pack 1 or later
• Netscape 6.1 or later
Radio Specifications
• 802.11a Channel Frequencies
• 802.11b Channel Frequencies
• 802.11g Channel Frequencies
• Wireless Communication Range
NOTE:
Refer to the Regulatory Flyer included with the AP for the latest
regulatory information.
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-11
Radio Specifications
802.11a Channel Frequencies
The available 802.11a Channels varies by regulatory domain and/or
country. 802.11a radio certification is available in the following regions:
• FCC: U.S., Canada, and Australia
• ETSI: Europe and the United Kingdom
• MKK: Japan
• SG: Singapore
• ASIA: China, Hong Kong, and South Korea
• TW: Taiwan
There are five sets of frequency bands that determine the available
channels depending on the regulatory domain.
Some countries restrict 802.11a operation to specific frequency bands.
The Web interface and CLI display the available channels for a radio's
particular regulatory domain. In the CLI, any channels that are not
available are labeled “Not Supported”.
C-12
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
Frequency
Band
Lower Band
(36 = default)
Middle Band
(52 = default)
H Band
Upper Band
(149 = default)
ISM Band
Channel FCC
ID
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
SG
(GHz)
ASIA
(GHz)
TW
(GHz)
34
—
—
5.170 1
—
—
—
36
5.180
5.180
—
5.180
—
—
38
—
—
5.190
—
—
—
40
5.200
5.200
—
5.200
—
—
42
—
—
5.210
—
—
—
44
5.220
5.220
—
5.220
—
—
46
—
—
5.230
—
—
—
48
5.240
5.240
—
5.240
—
—
52
5.260
5.260
—
—
—
5.260
56
5.280
5.280
—
—
—
5.280
58
5.300
5.300
—
—
—
5.300
60
5.320
5.320
—
—
—
5.320
100
—
5.500
—
—
—
—
104
—
5.520
—
—
—
—
108
—
5.540
—
—
—
—
112
—
5.560
—
—
—
—
116
—
5.580
—
—
—
—
120
—
5.600
—
—
—
—
124
—
5.620
—
—
—
—
128
—
5.640
—
—
—
—
132
—
5.660
—
—
—
—
136
—
5.680
—
—
—
—
140
—
5.700
—
—
—
—
149
5.745
—
—
5.745
5.745
5.745
153
5.675
—
—
5.675
5.675
5.675
157
5.785
—
—
5.785
5.785
5.785
161
5.805
—
—
5.805
5.805
5.805
165
5.825
—
—
5.825
—
5.825
Note 1: Channel 34 is the default channel for Japan
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-13
Radio Specifications
802.11b Channel Frequencies
The available 802.11b channels vary by regulatory domain and/or
country. 802.11b radio certification is available in the following regions:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, South America, India, Korea, Australia,
and South Africa
• ETSI - Most of Europe, including the United Kingdom, Ireland,
Singapore, and Hong Kong
• MKK - Japan
• IL - Israel
Some countries restrict 802.11b operation to specific frequency bands.
The web interface will always display the available channels depending in
the cards regulatory domain. In the CLI, any channels that are not
available are labeled “Not Supported”.
Channel ID
FCC
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
IL
(GHz)
1
2.412
2.412
2.412
-
2
2.417
2.417
2.417
-
3
2.422
2.422
2.422
-
4
2.427
2.427
2.427
2.427
5
2.432
2.432
2.432
2.432
1 of 2
C-14
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
Channel ID
FCC
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
IL
(GHz)
6
2.437
2.437
2.437
2.437
7
2.442
2.442
2.442
2.442
8
2.447
2.447
2.447
2.447
9
2.452
2.452
2.452
-
10
2.457
2.4571
2.457
-
11
2.462
2.462
1
2.462
-
12
-
2.4671
2.467
-
13
-
2.4721
2.472
-
14
-
-
2.484
-
Note 1: France is restricted to these four channels.
2 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-15
Radio Specifications
802.11g Channel Frequencies
The available 802.11g channels vary by regulatory domain and/or
country. 802.11g radio certification is available in the following regions:
• FCC - U.S./Canada, Mexico, and Australia
• ETSI - Europe and the United Kingdom
• ETSI - Europe, including the United Kingdom, China, and South
Korea
• MKK - Japan
• IL - Israel
Some countries restrict 802.11g operation to specific frequency bands.
The web interface will always display the available channels depending in
the cards regulatory domain. In the CLI, any channels that are not
available are labeled “Not Supported”.
Channel ID
FCC
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
IL
(GHz)
1
2.412
2.412
2.412
-
2
2.417
2.417
2.417
-
3
2.422
2.422
2.422
-
4
2.427
2.427
2.427
2.427
5
2.432
2.432
2.432
2.432
1 of 2
C-16
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
Channel ID
FCC
(GHz)
ETSI
(GHz)
MKK
(GHz)
IL
(GHz)
6
2.437
2.437
2.437
2.437
7
2.442
2.442
2.442
2.442
8
2.447
2.447
2.447
2.447
9
2.452
2.452
2.452
-
10
2.457
2.4571
2.457
-
11
2.462
2.462
1
2.462
-
12
-
2.4671
2.467
-
13
-
2.4721
2.472
14
-
-
2.484
2
-
Note 1: France is restricted to these channels.
Note 2: Channel 14 is only available when using 802.11b only mode.
2 of 2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-17
Radio Specifications
Wireless Communication Range
The range of the wireless signal is related to the composition of objects in
the radio wave path and the transmit rate of the wireless communication.
Communications at a lower transmit range may travel longer distances.
The range values listed in the Communications Range Chart are typical
distances as calculated by Avaya’s development team for FCC-certified
products. These values provide a rule of thumb and may vary according
to the actual radio conditions at the location where the product is used.
The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials. Range is
also impacted due to “obstacles” in the signal path of the radio that may
either absorb or reflect the radio signal.
In Open Office environments, antennas can “see” each other (no physical
obstructions between them). In Semi-open Office environments,
workspace is divided by shoulder-height, hollow wall elements; antennas
are at desktop level. In a Closed Office environment, solid walls and other
obstructions may affect signal strength.
The following tables show typical range values for various environments
for FCC-certified products (range may differ for products certified in other
regulatory domains).
C-18
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
AP-4 802.11b Wireless Communication Ranges
Range
Open Office
11 Mbits/s
5.5 Mbits/s
2 Mbits/s
1 Mbits/s
177 m
219 m
272 m
338 m
(581 ft.)
(718 ft.)
(892 ft.)
(1109 ft.)
Semi-Open
Office
122 m
151 m
187 m
232 m
(400 ft.)
(495 ft.)
(614 ft.)
(761 ft.)
Closed Office
84 m
104 m
129 m
160 m
(276 ft.)
(341 ft.)
(423 ft.)
(525 ft.)
Tx Power (dBm)
15
15
15
15
Receiver
Sensitivity (dBm)
-82
-85
-88
-91
Antenna Gain
3 dBi (integrated diversity antenna module; 2.4-2.5 GHz)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-19
Radio Specifications
AP-5 802.11a Wireless Communication Ranges
Range
54
48
Mbits/s Mbits/s
36
Mbits/s
24
Mbits/s
18
Mbits/s
12
Mbits/s
9
6
Mbits/s Mbits/s
Open
Office
37 m
57 m
82 m
(121 ft.) (187 ft.) (269 ft.)
118 m
(387 ft.)
146 m
(479 ft.)
169 m
181 m
195 m
(554 ft.) (594 ft.) (640 ft.)
SemiOpen
Office
26 m
(85 ft.)
39 m
57 m
(128 ft.) (187 ft.)
81 m
(266 ft.)
101 m
(331 ft.)
116 m
125 m
134 m
(381 ft.) (410 ft.) (440 ft.)
Closed
Office
18 m
(59 ft.)
27 m
(89 ft.)
39 m
(128 ft.)
56 m
(184 ft.)
69 m
(226 ft.)
80 m
86 m
92 m
(262 ft.) (282 ft.) (302 ft.)
Tx Power
(dBm)
12
14
15
16
16
16
16
16
-73
-77
-81
-84
-86
-87
-88
-69
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Antenna
Gain
C-20
4 dBi (integrated diversity antenna module; 5.15-5.85 GHz)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Radio Specifications
AP-6 802.11 b/g Wireless Communication Ranges
54
Mbits/s
48
Mbits/s
36
Mbits/s
24
Mbits/s
18
Mbits/s
12
Mbits/s
Open Office
60 m
(197 ft.)
75 m
(246 ft.)
123 m
(404 ft.)
164 m
(538 ft.)
204 m
(669 ft.)
253 m
(830 ft.)
Semi-Open
Office
41 m
(135 ft.)
51 m
(167 ft.)
85 m
(279 ft.)
113 m
(371 ft.)
140 m
(459 ft.)
174 m
(571 ft.)
Closed
Office
28 m
(92 ft.)
35 m
(115 ft.)
58 m
(190 ft.)
78 m
(256 ft.)
97 m
(318 ft.)
120 m
(394 ft.)
Tx Power
(dBm)
12
13
14
15
15
15
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
-70
-72
-78
-81
-84
-87
Range
Antenna
Gain
3 dBi (integrated diversity antenna module; 2.4-2.5 GHz)
9
Mbits/s
6
Mbits/s
11
Mbits/s
5.5
Mbits/s
2
Mbits/s
1
Mbits/s
Open Office
272 m
(892 ft.)
292 m
(258 ft.)
190m
(623 ft.)
219 m
(718 ft.)
236 m
(774 ft.)
314 m
(1030
ft.)
Semi-Open
Office
187 m
(614 ft.)
201 m
(659 ft.)
131 m
(430 ft.)
151 m
(495 ft.)
162 m
(531 ft.)
216 m
(709 ft.)
Closed
Office
129 m
(423 ft.)
138 m
(453 ft.)
90 m
(295 ft.)
104 m
(341 ft.)
111 m
(364 ft.)
149 m
(489 ft.)
Range
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
C-21
Radio Specifications
Tx Power
(dBm)
15
15
15
15
15
15
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
-88
-89
-83
-85
-86
-90
Antenna
Gain
C-22
3 dBi (integrated diversity antenna module; 2.4-2.5 GHz)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Technical Support
D
Before You Seek Help
If you are having a problem using an AP and cannot resolve it with the
information in Troubleshooting, gather the following information and
contact your local authorized reseller or visit
http://www.avaya.com/support for contact information:
• List of Avaya Wireless products installed on your network; include the
following:
— Product names and quantity
— Part numbers (P/N)
— Serial numbers (S/N)
• List of Avaya Wireless software versions installed
— Check the HTTP interface’s Version screen
— Include the source of the software version (e.g., pre-loaded on
unit, installed from CD, downloaded from Avaya Web site, etc.)
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
D-1
Before You Seek Help
• Information about your network
— Network operating system (e.g., Microsoft Networking);
include version information
— Protocols used by network (e.g., TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX,
AppleTalk)
— Ethernet frame type (e.g., 802.3, Ethernet II), if known
— IP addressing scheme (include address range and whether
static or DHCP)
— Network speed and duplex (10 or 100 Mbits/sec; full or half
duplex)
— Type of Ethernet device that the Access Points are connected
to (e.g., Power over Ethernet power injector, hub, switch, etc.)
— Type of Security enabled on the wireless network (None, WEP
Encryption, 802.1x, Mixed)
• A description of the problem you are experiencing
— What were you doing when the error occurred?
— What error message did you see?
— Can you reproduce the problem?
— For each Avaya Wireless product, describe the behavior of the
device’s LEDs when the problem occurs
D-2
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
Before You Seek Help
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide
D-3
Before You Seek Help
D-4
Avaya Wireless AP-4/5/6 User’s Guide